Wednesday, August21, 2019 L-36.com

Raymarine G Series User Refece 81276 2



Note:

This is the new page for displaying documents. It allows documents to display on devices without pdf viewers specifically mobile devices, a new Google requirement. Note also that some documents have blank pages. Just click on "Next Page" if that happens.
Previous Page    Next Page Go to page number Note: Page number may not agree with index page numbers


Previous Page    Next Page
Go to page number
Note: Page number may not agree with index page numbers

PDF to Text.

G-Series
system

User reference
Trademark and patents notice
Autohelm, hsb2, RayTech Navigator, Sail Pilot, SeaTalk, SeaTalkNG, SeaTalkHS and Sportpilot are registered trademarks of Raymarine
UK Limited. RayTalk, Seahawk, Smartpilot, Pathfinder and Raymarine are registered trademarks of Raymarine Holdings Limited.
FLIR is a registered trademark of FLIR Systems, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.
All other trademarks, trade names, or company names referenced herein are used for identification only and are the property of
their respective owners.
This product is protected by patents, design patents, patents pending, or design patents pending.

Fair Use Statement
You may print no more than three copies of this manual for your own use. You may not make any further copies or distribute or use the
manual in any other way including without limitation exploiting the manual commercially or giving or selling copies to third parties.
Copyright ©2010 Raymarine UK Ltd. All rights reserved.




ENGLISH
Document number: 81276-2
Date: 10-2010
Contents
Chapter 1 Important information............................... 9                      3.6 Compact keyboard layout .......................................... 30
Safety notices...................................................................9    3.7 Nav stations.............................................................. 30
TFT LCD Displays .......................................................... 10        3.8 Using the cursor........................................................ 32
Water ingress ................................................................. 10    3.9 Home screen overview .............................................. 33
Disclaimers .................................................................... 10   3.10 Pages..................................................................... 34
Chart cards and memory cards........................................ 11               3.11 Applications ............................................................ 35
EMC conformance .......................................................... 11         3.12 Screen overview ..................................................... 37
Suppression ferrites ........................................................ 11      3.13 Databar status symbols ........................................... 40
Connections to other equipment ...................................... 12              3.14 Initial setup procedures............................................ 43
Declaration of conformity................................................. 12
                                                                                      Chapter 4 Managing display data ........................... 47
Product disposal ............................................................. 12
                                                                                      4.1 Memory cards overview............................................. 48
Warranty registration....................................................... 12
                                                                                      4.2 Inserting a memory card, chart card, or CF /
IMO and SOLAS............................................................. 12         microSD card adaptor ..................................................... 48
Technical accuracy ......................................................... 12       4.3 Ensure chart card door is securely closed................... 49
Chapter 2 Handbook information............................ 13                         4.4 Removing a memory card, chart card, or CF /
                                                                                      microSD adaptor ............................................................ 49
2.1 Handbook information ............................................... 14
                                                                                      4.5 Saving user data and user settings............................. 50
Chapter 3 Getting started ........................................ 15                 4.6 Transferring data using NMEA ................................... 51
3.1 System integration .................................................... 16        4.7 Resetting your system ............................................... 52
3.2 Networking constraints .............................................. 20
                                                                                      Chapter 5 Using waypoints, routes and
3.3 Display power ........................................................... 22      tracks ......................................................................... 53
3.4 Monitor controls ........................................................ 22      5.1 Waypoints ................................................................ 54
3.5 Command Center Keyboard layout............................. 29                    5.2 Routes ..................................................................... 64

                                                                                                                                                                       5
5.3 Tracks ...................................................................... 69   7.8 Autopilot alarms ...................................................... 115
5.4 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage capacity ............ 71
                                                                                       Chapter 8 Using alarms and MOB
Chapter 6 Using the chart........................................ 73                   functions ................................................................. 117
6.1 Chart application overview ......................................... 74            8.1 Using Man Overboard (MOB) functions .................... 118
6.2 Vessel position and orientation................................... 76              8.2 Alarms.................................................................... 119
6.3 Chart views............................................................... 79      Chapter 9 Using radar ............................................ 125
6.4 Chart planning options............................................... 83
                                                                                       9.1 Radar overview....................................................... 126
6.5 Chart navigation options ............................................ 83
                                                                                       9.2 Digital radar scan speed .......................................... 126
6.6 Measuring distances and bearings ............................. 84
                                                                                       9.3 Radar scanner status symbols ................................. 127
6.7 Chart vectors ............................................................ 85
                                                                                       9.4 Radar range and image quality ................................ 128
6.8 Current information ................................................... 86
                                                                                       9.5 Radar display overview ........................................... 131
6.9 Tide information ........................................................ 87
                                                                                       9.6 Dual range radar operation ...................................... 133
6.10 Chart object information........................................... 89
                                                                                       9.7 Radar mode and orientation..................................... 134
6.11 Chart layers ............................................................ 90
                                                                                       9.8 Radar tuning: HD and SuperHD digital
6.12 Chart presentation................................................... 94          scanners ...................................................................... 137
6.13 Chart setup ............................................................. 97      9.9 Radar tuning: non-HD digital radomes...................... 142
                                                                                       9.10 Using radar to measure distances, ranges, and
Chapter 7 Using autopilot control......................... 107                         bearings....................................................................... 146
7.1 Enabling the autopilot control function ...................... 108                 9.11 Using radar to track targets and avoid
7.2 Disengaging the autopilot in an emergency............... 108                       collisions ...................................................................... 150
7.3 G-Series keyboard autopilot controls ........................ 109                  9.12 Radar setup menu options ..................................... 154
7.4 Autopilot dialog box ................................................. 110
                                                                                       Chapter 10 Using AIS ............................................. 157
7.5 Autopilot control options .......................................... 110
                                                                                       10.1 AIS overview......................................................... 158
7.6 Dodge control ..........................................................111
                                                                                       10.2 AIS prerequisites................................................... 159
7.7 Autopilot status symbols .......................................... 114

6                                                                                                                                                  G-Series User reference
10.3 Classes of AIS data............................................... 160        12.7 Fishfinder waypoints.............................................. 191
10.4 Enabling AIS......................................................... 161     12.8 Fishfinder alarms................................................... 191
10.5 Displaying AIS vectors........................................... 161         12.9 Fishfinder setup .................................................... 192
10.6 AIS status symbols................................................ 162
                                                                                   Chapter 13 Using the engine application ............. 199
10.7 AIS silent mode..................................................... 162
                                                                                   13.1 Engine application overview................................... 200
10.8 Viewing AIS target information ............................... 163
                                                                                   13.2 Displaying the engine application ........................... 200
10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions .................................. 164
                                                                                   13.3 Setting up the engine application............................ 201
10.10 AIS options ......................................................... 165
                                                                                   13.4 Changing the engine panel dial color ...................... 201
10.11 AIS alarms .......................................................... 166
                                                                                   13.5 Pre-configured data panels .................................... 202
10.12 Buddy tracking .................................................... 167
                                                                                   13.6 Changing what the engine application
10.13 Aid to Navigation (AToN) targets ........................... 169             displays ....................................................................... 204
10.14 Land base station targets..................................... 170
                                                                                   Chapter 14 Using the data application ................. 205
Chapter 11 Using the Course Deviation                                              14.1 Data application overview ...................................... 206
Indicator .................................................................. 173
                                                                                   14.2 Pre-configured data panels .................................... 207
11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview ....................... 174
                                                                                   14.3 Trim tab calibration ................................................ 210
11.2 Displaying the CDI application ................................ 175
                                                                                   14.4 Customizing the data application ............................ 210
11.3 Using the CDI application....................................... 175
                                                                                   Chapter 15 Using the weather application
Chapter 12 Using the fishfinder ............................ 177                   (North America only) .............................................. 213
12.1 Fishfinder introduction ........................................... 178       15.1 Weather application overview................................. 214
12.2 The sonar image ................................................... 179       15.2 Displaying the weather application.......................... 214
12.3 Fishfinder presets.................................................. 181      15.3 Weather application setup...................................... 215
12.4 Fishfinder display modes ....................................... 182          15.4 Weather application display overview ..................... 215
12.5 Fishfinder range .................................................... 185     15.5 Weather map navigation ........................................ 219
12.6 Fishfinder presentation options............................... 186            15.6 Weather reports .................................................... 219

                                                                                                                                                                     7
15.7 Storm tracking....................................................... 220    19.2 Camera control ..................................................... 242
15.8 Animated weather graphics.................................... 221            19.3 Image adjustments ................................................ 243
                                                                                  19.4 Camera setup ....................................................... 246
Chapter 16 Using Sirius satellite radio (North
America only).......................................................... 223       Chapter 20 DSC VHF radio integration................. 247
16.1 Sirius radio overview ............................................. 224      20.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your display ............... 248
16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio application..................... 224             20.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration....................... 249
16.3 Sirius radio basic operations .................................. 225
16.4 Sirius radio presets................................................ 226
                                                                                  Chapter 21 Customizing your system .................. 251
16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts ............................. 227          21.1 Customizing the vessel icon................................... 252
16.6 Sirius radio parental locking ................................... 228        21.2 Customizing the databar ........................................ 252
                                                                                  21.3 Compass setup ..................................................... 254
Chapter 17 Using Navtex ....................................... 229               21.4 GPS setup ............................................................ 254
17.1 Navtex overview.................................................... 230      21.5 System setup menu............................................... 256
17.2 Navtex setup......................................................... 230
17.3 Viewing and managing Navtex messages ............... 231
                                                                                  Chapter 22 Maintaining your display.................... 263
                                                                                  22.1 Service and maintenance ...................................... 264
Chapter 18 Using video.......................................... 233              22.2 Routine equipment checks..................................... 264
18.1 Video application overview..................................... 234          22.3 Cleaning ............................................................... 265
18.2 Video setup........................................................... 235   22.4 Cleaning the display screen ................................... 265
18.3 Using video........................................................... 236
18.4 Video adjustments................................................. 236
                                                                                  Chapter 23 Technical support ............................... 267
18.5 Audio adjustments................................................. 237       23.1 Raymarine customer support ................................. 268
                                                                                  23.2 3rd party support ................................................... 269
Chapter 19 Using the thermal camera
application............................................................... 239
19.1 Thermal camera application overview ..................... 240

8                                                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
Chapter 1: Important information                                          Warning: Sonar operation
                                                                          · NEVER operate the sounder with the boat out of
                                                                            the water.
Safety notices
                                                                          · NEVER touch the transducer face when the sounder
                                                                            is powered on.
               Warning: Ensure safe navigation
                                                                          · SWITCH OFF the sounder if divers are likely to be
               This product is intended only as an aid to navigation
                                                                            within 7.6 m (25 ft) of the transducer.
               and must never be used in preference to sound
               navigational judgment. Only official government
               charts and notices to mariners contain all the current     Warning: Autopilot control
               information needed for safe navigation, and the
               captain is responsible for their prudent use. It is the    The autopilot functions available on the multifunction
               user's responsibility to use official government charts,   display do NOT replace the autopilot control head.
               notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational       You must have a pilot control head installed before
               skill when operating this or any other Raymarine           you enable or engage the autopilot.
               product.
                                                                          Warning: Radar scanner safety
               Warning: Product installation and
                                                                          Before rotating the radar scanner, ensure all personnel
               operation                                                  are clear.
               This product must be installed and operated in
               accordance with the instructions provided. Failure to      Warning: Radar transmission safety
               do so could result in personal injury, damage to your
               boat and/or poor product performance.                      The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy.
                                                                          Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner when
                                                                          the radar is transmitting.
               Warning: High voltages
               This product contains high voltages. Do NOT remove
               any covers or otherwise attempt to access internal
               components, unless specifically instructed in this
               document.




Important information                                                                                                               9
     Caution: Care of chart cards                             TFT LCD Displays
     To avoid irreparable damage to and/or loss of data       The colors of the display may seem to vary when viewed against
     from chart cards:                                        a colored background or in colored light. This is a perfectly normal
                                                              effect that can be seen with all color Liquid Crystal Displays (LCDs).
     · Ensure that chart cards are fitted the correct way
       around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.      In common with all Thin Film Transistor (TFT) LCD units, the screen
                                                              may exhibit a few (less than 7) wrongly illuminated pixels. These
     · DO NOT save data (waypoints, routes, and so on)        may appear as black pixels in a light area of the screen or as colored
       to a chart card, as the charts may be overwritten.     pixels in black areas.
     · DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a
       screwdriver or pliers to remove a chart card.
     · Safe removal. Use the Remove Card menu option          Water ingress
       before removing the chart card.
                                                              Water ingress disclaimer
                                                              Although the waterproof rating capacity of Raymarine products
     Caution: Ensure chart card door is                       exceeds that called for by the IPX6 standard, water intrusion
     securely closed                                          and subsequent equipment failure may occur if any Raymarine
                                                              equipment is subjected to commercial high pressure washing.
     To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to        Raymarine will not warrant equipment subjected to high pressure
     the display, ensure that the chart card door is firmly   washing.
     closed. This can be confirmed by an audible click.


     Caution: Cleaning                                        Disclaimers
     When cleaning this product:
                                                              This product (including the electronic charts) is intended to be used
     · Do NOT wipe the display screen with a dry cloth, as    only as an aid to navigation. It is designed to facilitate use of official
       this could scratch the screen coating.                 government charts, not replace them. Only official government
                                                              charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information
     · Do NOT use abrasive, or acid or ammonia based          needed for safe navigation, and the captain is responsible for their
       products.                                              prudent use. It is the user's responsibility to use official government
     · Do NOT use a jet wash.                                 charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational skill
                                                              when operating this or any other Raymarine product. This product
                                                              supports electronic charts provided by third party data suppliers
                                                              which may be embedded or stored on memory card. Use of such


10                                                                                                                 G-Series User reference
charts is subject to the supplier's End-User Licence Agreement           want to use microSD or microSDHC chart cards, you must purchase
included in the documentation for this product or supplied with the      the optional CF / microSD card adaptor and insert it into the
memory card (as applicable).                                             CompactFlash card slot on your unit. The microSD or microSDHC
Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it    chart card must be inserted into the adaptor.
is compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity
other than Raymarine.                                                    Use branded chart cards and memory cards
This product uses digital chart data, and electronic information from    When archiving data, Raymarine recommends the use of quality
the Global Positioning System (GPS) which may contain errors.            branded memory cards. Some brands of memory card may not
Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such information and          work in your unit. Please contact customer support for a list of
you are advised that errors in such information may cause the            recommended cards.
product to malfunction. Raymarine is not responsible for damages
or injuries caused by your use or inability to use the product, by the
interaction of the product with products manufactured by others, or
by errors in chart data or information utilized by the product and
                                                                         EMC conformance
supplied by third parties.                                               Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate
                                                                         Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations for use in the
                                                                         recreational marine environment.
Chart cards and memory cards                                             Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is
                                                                         not compromised.
Compatible cards
The following types of memory or chart card are compatible with
your Raymarine system:
                                                                         Suppression ferrites
· CompactFlash (CF)
· micro Secure Digital (microSD)                                         Raymarine cables may be fitted with suppression ferrites. These
                                                                         are important for correct EMC performance. If a ferrite has to be
· micro Secure Digital High-Capacity (microSDHC)                         removed for any purpose (e.g. installation or maintenance), it must
                                                                         be replaced in the original position before the product is used.
 Note: microSD and microSDHC cards require the optional
 Raymarine CF / microSD card adaptor. Only the official                  Use only ferrites of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine
 Raymarine adaptor is compatible with your system.                       authorized dealers.

Chart cards
Your system is pre-loaded with electronic charts for your region. If
you wish to use different chart data, you can insert compatible CF
chart cards into the CompactFlash card slot on your unit. If you

Important information                                                                                                                         11
Connections to other equipment                                            It is important that you register your product to receive full warranty
                                                                          benefits. Your unit package includes a bar code label indicating the
Requirement for ferrites on non-Raymarine cables                          serial number of the unit. You should stick this label to the warranty
                                                                          registration card.
If your Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment
using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a suppression ferrite
MUST always be attached to the cable near the Raymarine unit.
                                                                          IMO and SOLAS
                                                                          The equipment described within this document is intended for use
Declaration of conformity                                                 on leisure marine boats and workboats not covered by International
                                                                          Maritime Organization (IMO) and Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)
Raymarine Ltd. declares that G-Series systems are in compliance
                                                                          Carriage Regulations.
with the essential requirements of EMC directive 2004/108/EC.
The original Declaration of Conformity certificate may be viewed on
the relevant product page at www.raymarine.com
                                                                          Technical accuracy
                                                                          To the best of our knowledge, the information in this document was
Product disposal                                                          correct at the time it was produced. However, Raymarine cannot
                                                                          accept liability for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. In
Dispose of this product in accordance with the WEEE Directive.            addition, our policy of continuous product improvement may change
                                                                          specifications without notice. As a result, Raymarine cannot accept
                                                                          liability for any differences between the product and this document.

       The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Directive requires the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some
Raymarine products, we support its policy and ask you to be aware
of how to dispose of this product.



Warranty registration
To register your Raymarine product ownership, please take a few
minutes to fill out the warranty registration card found in the box, or
visit www.raymarine.com and register on-line.

12                                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
Chapter 2: Handbook information

Chapter contents
·    2.1 Handbook information on page 14




Handbook information                       13
2.1 Handbook information                                               Additional handbooks
                                                                        Description                       Part number
This handbook contains important information regarding the
operation of the G-Series system.                                       SeaTalkng   reference manual      81300

About this handbook                                                    All documents are available to download as PDFs from
                                                                       www.raymarine.com.
This handbook describes how to operate your multifunction display
in conjunction with compatible electronic cartography and peripheral
equipment.                                                             Handbook conventions
It assumes that all peripheral equipment to be operated with it        IMPORTANT INFORMATION relating to the conventions used in
is compatible and has been correctly installed. This handbook          this handbook.
is intended for users of varying marine abilities, but assumes a       This handbook relates to the 2010 software update for G-Series
general level of knowledge of display use, nautical terminology        systems. One of the key software features introduced in this
and practices.                                                         software update is the home screen, which is referred to in this
                                                                       handbook.
G-Series handbooks                                                     Some Raymarine products include a dedicated HOME button for
                                                                       accessing the home screen.
The G-Series system has the following handbooks available:
                                                                       The G-Series keyboard (and Compact variant) does NOT have
G-Series handbooks                                                     a Home button. The PAGE button is used instead. Where this
                                                                       handbook refers to the home screen, you can press the PAGE
 Description                              Part number                  button on the G-Series keyboard to display the home screen at any
                                                                       time.
 G-Series system installation and         87070
 commissioning instructions
 G-Series system operating instructions   86126
 (quick reference)
 G-Series system user reference           81276
 handbook
 Glass Bridge monitors user guide         81324
 G-Series compact keyboard                81316
 G-Series command center keyboard         87084

14                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
Chapter 3: Getting started

Chapter contents
·    3.1 System integration on page 16
·    3.2 Networking constraints on page 20
·    3.3 Display power on page 22
·    3.4 Monitor controls on page 22
·    3.5 Command Center Keyboard layout on page 29
·    3.6 Compact keyboard layout on page 30
·    3.7 Nav stations on page 30
·    3.8 Using the cursor on page 32
·    3.9 Home screen overview on page 33
·    3.10 Pages on page 34
·    3.11 Applications on page 35
·    3.12 Screen overview on page 37
·    3.13 Databar status symbols on page 40
·    3.14 Initial setup procedures on page 43




Getting started                                      15
3.1 System integration
You can add additional features and functions to your G-Series
system by connecting a number of external devices to your
multifunction display via the GPM400 processor module.
The following diagram illustrates the various external devices that
can be connected to your system:
                                                                                                      Instruments

                                                                                                                                                      Video / Camera / Satellite TV
                                    External GPS


                                                                                                                                                                  Thermal camera
                              Autopilot



                                                                                   G-Series system
      DSC VHF                                                                                                                                                Digital Open Array radar scanner
           11.18.0




                     RAY240




                                                             1     2      3
                                                                   ABC   DEF




                                                                                                                                                                           or
                                                             4     5      6                 WPTS
                                                            GHI    JKL   MNO    PAGE                         MENU                   OUT
                                                                                                MOB

                                                                                                                                   RANGE
                                                   ENTER
                                                             7     8      9                                                         IN
                                                            PQRS   TUV   WXYZ          ACTIVE         DATA



                                                             .     0
                                                                                DODGE      STANDBY           PILOT   OK   CANCEL




                                                                                                                                                               Digital Radome scanner
     AIS receiver /
      transceiver



 Personal                         Fishfinder               SeaT alkhs                                                                             Additional
 Computer                      DSM30, 300, or 400          switch                                                                          multifunction display(s)    Weather receiver
                                                                                                                                                                                            D11692_1




A variety of protocols are used to transfer data between the various
devices in your networked system. The following table details which
devices may be connected, and the type of connectivity (in terms of
protocols and physical interfaces):

16                                                                                                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
 Device Type      Suitable Devices           Connectivity   Device Type               Suitable Devices          Connectivity
 Radar            Up to two of the           SeaTalkhs                                of ONE of the following
                  following Raymarine                                                 Raymarine fishfinders:
                  radar scanners may                                                  · DSM 30
                  be connected to
                  your system. Both                                                   · DSM 300
                  scanners may be
                  operated simultaneously                                             · DSM 400
                  if required.                              Cartography -- included   Embedded (internal)       GPM400 internal
                                                                                      Navionics cartography     storage
                  · 4 kilowatt Digital
                    Radome Scanner                          Cartography -- optional   External CompactFlash,    Card slot
                  · 4 kilowatt HD Digital                                             microSD, or microSDHC
                                                                                      chart cards:               Note: microSD
                    Radome Scanner
                                                                                                                 and microSDHC
                  · 4 kilowatt HD Digital                                             · Navionics Silver         cards require the
                    Open Array Scanner                                                · Navionics Gold           optional Raymarine
                                                                                                                 CF / microSD card
                  · 12 kilowatt HD Digital                                            · Navionics Gold+          adaptor. Only the
                    Open Array Scanner                                                                           official Raymarine
                                                                                      · Navionics Platinum       adaptor is compatible
                  · 4 kilowatt SuperHD
                    Digital Open Array                                                · Navionics Platinum+      with your system.
                    Scanner
                                                                                      · Navionics Fish'N Chip
                  · 12 kilowatt SuperHD
                                                                                      · Navionics Hotmaps
                    Digital Open Array
                    Scanner                                                           Refer to the
                                                                                      Raymarine website
                   Note: Please                                                       (www.raymarine.com)
                   ensure your radar                                                  for the latest list of
                   scanner is using                                                   supported chart cards.
                   the latest software
                   version.                                 GVM video module          Up to 3 Raymarine GVM     SeaTalkhs
                                                                                      video modules
 Fishfinder       The G-Series system        SeaTalkhs
                  supports the connection


Getting started                                                                                                                          17
 Device Type                Suitable Devices           Connectivity               Device Type                Suitable Devices           Connectivity
 Sirius Weather/Audio       · Raymarine SR100          SeaTalkhs                  Keyboard                   A maximum of 8             SeaTalkng
                              Sirius Weather                                                                 Raymarine keyboards
                              Receiver                                                                       may be connected
                                                                                                             to a G-Series
 AIS                        The G-Series system        NMEA 0183 or                                          system, including any
                            supports the connection    SeaTalkng                                             combination of:
                            of ONE of the following
                            AIS units:                                                                       · G-Series Command
                                                                                                               Centre Keyboard
                            · Raymarine AIS 250                                                                (wired)
                            · Raymarine AIS 500                                                              · G-Series Command
                            · Third-party AIS Class                                                            Centre Keyboard
                              A or Class B receiver                                                            (wireless; requires
                              / transceiver                                                                    optional wireless
                                                                                                               upgrade kit)
 Navtex                     Navtex Receiver            NMEA 0183
                                                                                                             · G-Series Compact
 Fast Heading Sensor        Fast Heading Sensor        NMEA 0183                                               Keyboard (wired)
 GPS -- external            Raystar125 GPS or          SeaTalk, SeaTalkng, or     Additional multifunction   · Any combination of up    SeaTalkhs
                            third-party external GPS   NMEA 0183                  display(s)                   to 8 G-Series or Glass
                            receiver                                                                           Bridge monitors.
 Instruments                All current Raymarine      SeaTalk, SeaTalkng, or                                · Maximum 2 E-Series
                            instruments                NMEA 0183                                               Widescreen E90W,
                                                                                                               E120W, E140W
 Autopilot -- Raymarine     All current Raymarine      SeaTalk, SeaTalkng                                      displays.
                            autopilots
 Autopilot -- third party   Third-party autopilots     NMEA 0183 (waypoint
                                                       and bearing information)
 VHF radio                  Raymarine DSC VHF          NMEA 0183, SeaTalk
                            radios




18                                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
 Device Type             Suitable Devices          Connectivity               Device Type   Suitable Devices   Connectivity
 External (non-          Each GPM processor        · 2 x DVI connectors.
 Raymarine) display(s)   unit supports the
                         following resolutions:    · Both DVI connectors
                                                     support VGA using
                         · 1024 X 768                the optional adaptor
                                                     cable.
                         · 1280 X 720
                         · 1280 X 768
                         · 1280 X 800
                         · 1280 X 1024
 Thermal camera          The G-Series system       SeaTalkhs (for control),
                         supports the connection   BNC connector (for
                         of ONE of the following   video, via GVM video
                         Raymarine thermal         module)
                         cameras:
                         · T300 thermal camera
                           (9 Hz)
                         · T303 thermal camera
                           (30 Hz)
                         · T350 thermal camera
                           (9 Hz)
                         · T400 thermal camera
                           (9 Hz)
                         · T403 thermal camera
                           (30 Hz)
                         · T450 thermal camera
                           (9 Hz)




Getting started                                                                                                               19
 Device Type   Suitable Devices           Connectivity   3.2 Networking constraints
                                                         The following constraints apply when networking an E-Series
               · 4 x composite video
                                                         Widescreen display with a G-Series system.
                 inputs (PAL or NTSC).
                 Only 3 available if                     General
                 S-Video input in use).
                                                         · E-Series Widescreen displays must be connected to the G-Series
               · 1 x S-Video input                         system via SeaTalkhs.
                 (PAL or NTSC).
                                                         · E-Series Widescreen displays can be connected via NMEA 0183.
               · 1 x stereo line-level
                 audio input (for                        · E-Series Widescreen displays must NOT be connected to
                 S-Video / Composite                       SeaTalkng when part of a G-Series network.
                 input 4 only).                          · E-Series Widescreen displays must NOT be connected to SeaTalk
                                                           when part of a G-Series network.
                Note: Video
                connected to the                         Master / slave operation
                GVM400 can be
                viewed on any                            · When using an E-Series Widescreen display in a G-Series
                G-Series displays                          system, the G-Series GPM processor unit is ALWAYS the data
                on the SeaTalkhs                           master.
                network.                                 Nav stations
                                                         An E-Series Widescreen display can NOT form part of a G-Series
                                                         Nav Station configuration.
                                                         Home screen sharing
                                                         · For networks featuring ONLY E-Series Widescreen units:
                                                           ­ Networked E-Series Widescreen units share home screens.
                                                         · For networks featuring ONLY G-Series GPM processor units:
                                                           ­ Networked GPM processor units share home screens.
                                                         · For networks featuring E-Series Widescreen AND G-Series GPM
                                                           processor units:
                                                           ­ E-Series Widescreen units share home screens.
                                                           ­ GPM processor units share home screens.

20                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
  ­ E-Series Widescreen units do NOT share home screens with            Keyboards
    GPM processor units.
                                                                        If a SeaTalkng keyboard is being used to control an E-Series
Cartography sharing                                                     Widescreen display it must be connected directly to the E-Series
                                                                        Widescreen display using SeaTalkng. It must NOT be connected
· Chart card cartography is shared between E-Series Widescreen          to the G-Series SeaTalkng bus.
  displays and G-Series GPM processor units.
                                                                        GPS
· Embedded cartography can NOT be shared between E-Series
  Widescreen displays and G-Series GPM processor units.                 A networked system does NOT support multiple GPS receivers.

· An E-Series Widescreen display will share its embedded
  cartography with another E-Series Widescreen display on the
  same network.
· A G-Series GPM processor unit will share its embedded
  cartography with other G-Series GPM processor units on the
  same network.
· The cartography contained on chart cards is always used in
  preference to embedded cartography when a chart card is
  inserted into a card slot.

Radar operation
· The G-Series system supports the use of 2 radar scanners at
  the same time.
· An E-Series Widescreen display in a G-Series system can
  operate 1 scanner at any one time. To use the second scanner
  you must select it in the Radar application's Setup Menu. This
  does not automatically power down the first scanner. When 2
  scanners are connected you can power-down the second scanner
  at any time using the radar power controls, accessible from the
  display's power button.
· The rotating scanner icon in the status bar indicates the status of
  all connected scanners, not just the currently selected scanner.
  Similarly, if you have a G-Series Compact keyboard connected to
  an E-Series Widescreen display the radar status LED located on
  the keyboard reflects the status of ALL scanners.
Getting started                                                                                                                            21
3.3 Display power                                                3.4 Monitor controls
                                                                 Raymarine monitors feature a number of controls for customizing
Powering the display on                                          display settings.
1. Press and hold the POWER button until the Raymarine logo      The G-Series range of monitors (excluding Glass Bridge monitors)
   appears.                                                      features the following controls, located on the bezel:
2. Press OK to acknowledge the warning window.
                                                                  Control     Description

Powering the display off                                                      VGA 1 / menu
1. Press and hold the POWER button until the countdown reaches
   zero.                                                                      VGA 2 / scroll down

 Note: If the POWER button is released before the countdown
 reaches zero, the power off is cancelled.                                    VGA 2 / scroll up

                                                                              DVI 1 / scroll left

                                                                              DVI 1 / scroll left

                                                                              Composite Video 1 / PIP

                                                                              Composite Video 2 / Brightness

                                                                              Composite Video 3 / Night mode

                                                                              S-Video / Enter

                                                                              Power




22                                                                                                             G-Series User reference
Switching monitors on / off                                             OSD -- On Screen Display
These steps show how to switch G-Series monitors on or off using a      The OSD provides on screen menu options to set up and operate
G-Series keyboard.                                                      the monitor.
1. Press the Power key to display the system power softkeys.                 1             2             3
2. Select the Monitor controls softkey.
3. Select the Monitor power softkey.
4. Use the Trackpad to select the required Nav Station.
5. Select On or Standby as required.
   This will affect the monitors for the selected Nav Station.

 Note: If you wish to remove power from a monitor you must
 switch off the appropriate breaker at the distribution panel.


Adjusting the monitor brightness
On the G-Series keyboard:
1. Press the POWER button on the keyboard once.
   The backlight level control is displayed on the monitor.
2. Using the rotary control, adjust the brightness level as
   appropriate.
3. To adjust the brightness for a monitor assigned to a different Nav
   Station, press the rotary control once and select the appropriate     Item            Description
   Nav Station from the list.
                                                                         1               Function tab
Adjusting the monitor color palette                                      2               Sub menu
On the G-Series keyboard:                                                3               Control name
1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                        There are 7 function tabs across the top of the OSD, from left to right:
2. Select the DISPLAY SETUP menu option.
3. Use the COLOR PALETTE softkey to select the appropriate              · Video input
   color palette.                                                       · Picture in Picture (PIP)
                                                                        · Night mode
Getting started                                                                                                                              23
· Adjust                                                                  · 3 x VGA inputs.
· Setup                                                                   · 2 x DVI inputs.
· Color                                                                   · 3 x Composite video inputs.
· Input naming
                                                                          · 1 x S-Video input.

OSD controls                                                              Naming inputs
The OSD functions are accessed using the G-Series Keyboard.               With the Input Naming menu displayed:
             Menu                                                         1. Highlight the required input name.
                                                                          2. Press Enter.
             1.   Press to show the OSD menu for the selected monitor.
                                                                          3. Use the up and down keys to change the letter or number value.
             2.   Press to move between the function tabs.
                                                                          4. Use the left and right keys to select the previous or next
             3.   Press to exit a sub-menu.                                  character of the name.
             4.   Press and hold to exit the OSD menu.                    5. When you have finished, press Enter to accept the changes.

             Left/Right
                                                                          PIP (picture in picture)
             1.   Select monitor/OSD scroll left/right.
                                                                          The Picture-in-Picture (PIP) feature allows you to view a second
             2.   Move between function tabs.                             input as a picture inset within the main screen.
             3.   Adjust setting values (e.g. brightness level) when in   The PIP offers three choices for the inset picture, these are Child,
                  appropriate sub menu.                                   Split and Wide.

             Up/Down.
             · Press down to enter the sub-menu of the highlighted tab.
             · Navigate up and down through the menu list of options.
             Enter -- Select option or accept setting.
     ENTER




Video input
You can select from the available input sources:

24                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
Child             Split




Getting started           25
Wide                                                                      Function         Description
                                                                          Layout           Select from 3 different PIP layouts.
                                                                                           · Child window -- Produces a picture within the main
                                                                                             screen.
                                                                                           · Split window -- Splits the main screen in two sections
                                                                                             vertically.
                                                                                           · Wide window -- Gives a widescreen picture.
                                                                          PIP Size         Child layout only.
                                                                                           Adjust the size of the PIP image.
                                                                          PIP H Pos        Child layout only.
                                                                                           Adjust the horizontal position of the PIP image.
                                                                          PIP V Pos        Child layout only.
                                                                                           Adjust the vertical position of the PIP image.
                                                                          White Balance    Adjust the brightness of the PIP image. Set a value
                                                                                           between 0 and 100.
                                                                          Contrast         Adjust the contrast of the PIP image. Set a value between
                                                                                           0 and 100.
                                                                          Color            Adjust the color depth of the PIP image. Set a value
PIP setup menu                                                                             between 0 and 100.
 Function        Description                                              PIP Image tint   Split and Wide layouts only.
 PIP On/Off      Toggle between PIP On and Off.                                            Adjust the tint of the PIP image. Set a value between 0
                                                                                           and 100.
 Input source    Select from the available source inputs.
                                                                          PIP Image        Split and Wide layouts only.
                  Note: Some video inputs cannot be viewed in the PIP     sharpness        Adjust the sharpness of the PIP image. Set a value
                  source when certain inputs are on the main screen.                       between 0 and 100.
                  When this occurs the message "Unsupported Input" will
                  appear in the PIP window.



26                                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
Night mode                                                                     Function     Description
The night mode OSD option allows you to dim the screen to a red                Tint         Composite and S-Video only.
color palette, suitable for night time navigation.                                          Adjust the main screen tint. Set a value between 0 and 100.
 Function         Description                                                  Sharpness    Composite and S-Video only.
 Night mode       Toggle between Night mode On and Off.                                     Adjusts the main screen sharpness. Set a value between 0
                                                                                            and 100.
                                                                               H position   VGA, Composite and S-Video only.
Adjust menu                                                                                 Adjust the horizontal position of the main screen. Set a
                                                                                            value between 0 and 100.
 Function         Description
                                                                               V position   VGA, Composite and S-Video only.
 Brightness       Adjust the display backlighting. Set a value between 0
                                                                                            Adjust the vertical position of the main screen. Set a value
                  and 100.
                                                                                            between 0 and 100.
 White balance    Adjust the level of white on the screen. Set a value
                  between 0 and 100.
                                                                               Setup menu
 Contrast         VGA, Composite and S-Video only.
                  Adjust the level of screen contrast. Set a value between 0   Function     Description
                  and 100.
                                                                               Language     Select the language for the OSD menus. This can be either
 Auto             VGA only.                                                                 English, German, French, Spanish, or Italian.
                  Automatically set the clock and phase sampling frequencies
                  for the current VGA input.                                   Image size   Not available in PIP mode.
                                                                                            Options to adjust the image size and scale:
 Clock            VGA only.
                  Adjust the VGA input sampling clock frequency. Set a                      · Fill All - stretches the image to fill the entire screen.
                  value between 0 and 100.                                                  · Fill Aspect - makes the image as large as possible while
 Phase            VGA only.                                                                   maintaining the aspect ratio.
                  Adjust the VGA input sampling clock phase. Set a value                    · Fill 1:1 - the image is displayed at its original resolution.
                  between 0 and 100.
                                                                               OSD h pos    Move the OSD window horizontally. Set a value between 0
 Color            Composite and S-Video only.                                               and 100.
                  Adjust the main screen color depth. Set a value between 0
                  and 100.                                                     OSD v pos    Move the OSD window vertically. Set a value between 0
                                                                                            and 100.


Getting started                                                                                                                                           27
 Function        Description
 OSD             Adjust the transparency of the OSD. Select either opaque
 transparency    or translucent.
 Zoom            Not available in PIP mode.
                 Set the magnification level for the main image. Set a value
                 between 0 and 100.
 Pan vert        Not available in PIP mode.
                 Used in conjunction with the zoom function, enables you
                 to move up or down the magnified image. Set a value
                 between 0 and 100.
 Pan horiz       Not available in PIP mode.
                 Used in conjunction with the zoom function, enables you to
                 move left or right the zoomed image. Set a value between
                 0 and 100.
 Factory reset   Selecting this option will reset all monitor settings to their
                 factory default value.
 Information     Resolution and refresh rate for the main image.


Color menu
 Function        Description
 Color temp      Enables you to adjust the color temperature of the picture.
                 · 6500K
                 · 9300K
                 · User -- enables you to manually set a value between
                   0 and 255 for red, green and blue.




28                                                                                G-Series User reference
3.5 Command Center Keyboard layout
The command center keyboard provides controls for all aspects of the G-Series system.




                                         1      2       3
                                               ABC     DEF



                                         4      5       6                            WPTS
                                        GHI    JKL     MNO           PAGE                          MENU                           OUT
                                                                                     MOB

                                                                                                                                 RANGE
              ENTER
                                         7      8       9                                                                         IN
                                        PQRS   TUV     WXYZ                 ACTIVE          DATA



                                         .      0
                                                                    DODGE        STANDBY           PILOT       OK       CANCEL




                  1     2                                     3                        4                   5        6
                                                                                                                                         D10547-2



1. Power key
2. Monitor select / OSD (On Screen Display) controls
3. Softkeys
4. Autopilot controls
5. Rotary controller
6. Trackpad




Getting started                                                                                                                                     29
3.6 Compact keyboard layout                                                                     3.7 Nav stations
The Compact keyboard provides controls for most aspects of the                                  A Nav Station is a grouping of up to 4 monitors and a keyboard,
G-Series system.                                                                                enabling you to adjust the brightness and power for all monitors
                                                                                                from the same keyboard.
                                                                                                Each Nav Station includes at least 1 monitor and at least 1 keyboard:
                                                                                                Monitors -- Up to 2 monitors can be connected to each GPM
                                                                                                processor in your system.
                                                                                       8
                                                                                                Keyboards -- A keyboard can be assigned to a single monitor, a
                                                                                       7        Nav Station, or all monitors in your system, but can only control 1
                        WPTS
        PAGE                          MENU
                        MOB                                           OUT                       monitor at a time. You can select which monitor you want to control
                                                                     RANGE                      from the keyboard. When a keyboard is associated with a monitor,
               ACTIVE          DATA                                   IN
                                                                                                this provides full control of the system.

                     PILOT
                                                     RADAR ON                                   The following diagram illustrates a typical Nav Station arrangement:
                    STANDBY                                     OK          CANCEL




         1               2            3      4   5      6
                                                                                     D11892-1




1. Power key.
2. Autopilot control.
3. Monitor select key.
4. Rotary control.
5. Selected monitor indicators.
6. Radar transmitting indicator.
7. Trackpad.
8. Softkeys.



30                                                                                                                                               G-Series User reference
                                                                                                                                                                               Number         Description
                                                                                                                                                                               1              Nav Station 1 (flybridge)
                                                                                                                                                                               2              Nav Station 2 (bridge)
                                                                                                                                                                               3              Below-decks components (for example, GPM processor unit,
                                                                                                                                                                                              GVM video module)
                                           1           2           3




                                                                                                                                                                              Refer to the installation instructions for information on planning and
                                                       ABC       DEF



                                           4           5           6                       WPTS
                                          GHI          JKL       MNO           PAGE                         MENU                                    OUT
                                                                                               MOB

                                                                                                                                                   RANGE
                          ENTER
                                           7           8           9                                                                                IN
                                          PQRS         TUV       WXYZ                 ACTIVE         DATA



                                                       0




                  1
                                                                               DODGE      STANDBY           PILOT            OK        CANCEL




                                                                                                                                                                              configuring the Nav Station(s) for your system.

                                                                                                                                                                              Assigning a keyboard to an individual monitor
                                                                                                                                                                              1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                                                                                                                              2. Select System Setup.
                                                                                                                                                                              3. Select System Configuration.
                                                                                                                                                                              4. Select Assign Keyboards.
                                                  1          2           3
                                                             ABC        DEF




                                  ENTER
                                                  4
                                                 GH



                                                  7
                                                   I




                                                 PQRS
                                                             5
                                                             JKL



                                                             8
                                                             TUV
                                                                         6
                                                                        MNO



                                                                         9
                                                                        WXYZ
                                                                                        PAGE




                                                                                               ACTIVE
                                                                                                      WPTS
                                                                                                        MOB




                                                                                                              DATA
                                                                                                                     MENU                                   OUT

                                                                                                                                                           RANGE
                                                                                                                                                            IN

                                                                                                                                                                                 A list of available keyboards is displayed.
                  2
                                                             0
                                                                                       DODGE         STANDBY         PILOT        OK            CANCEL




                                                                                                                                                                              5. Select the appropriate keyboard from the list.
                                                                                                                                                                              6. Select the ASSIGN TO MONITOR softkey.
                                                                                                                                                                              7. Select the appropriate monitor.

                                                                                                                                                                              Assigning a keyboard to a nav station
                                                                                                                                                                              1.   Press the MENU button.
                                                                                                                                                                              2.   Select System Setup.
                      3
                                                                                                                                                                              3.   Select System Configuration.
                                                                                                                                                                              4.   Select Assign Keyboards.
                                                                                                                                                                              5.   Select the appropriate keyboard from the list.
                                                                                                                                                                              6.   Select the ASSIGN TO NAVSTATION softkey.
                                                                                                                                                                              7.   Select the appropriate Nav Station.
                                                                                                                                                                   D10239-2




Getting started                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          31
3.8 Using the cursor                                                                       Label     Feature                 Application

The cursor is used to move around the screen:                                              HDG       Heading vector          Chart

                         The cursor appears on the screen as a white cross.                MARPA     MARPA target            Radar
                                                                                           MOB       Man Over Board marker   Chart, Radar
             D7366_3




                                                                                           POS       Vessel's position       Chart
                                                                                           RTE       Route leg               Chart
                         If the cursor has not been moved for a short period of time,      SHM       Ship's Heading Marker   Radar
                         it changes to a circle with a cross in it, to make it easier to
                         locate on the screen.                                             TIDE      Tide indicator          Chart
               D7368_2




                                                                                           TRACK     Track line              Chart

                         The cursor is context-sensitive. When it is placed over an        VRM/EBL   VRM and EBL, 1 or 2     Radar
                         object such as a waypoint or chart feature, it changes color      WIND      Wind indicator          Chart
                         and a label or information associated with the object is
               D7369-2




       WPT               displayed. When you place the cursor over certain items, the      WPT       Waypoint                Chart, Radar
                         softkeys change to provide related options.



List of cursor labels
 Label                            Feature                      Application
 A/B                              Ruler line                   Chart
 AIS                              AIS target                   Chart
 COG                              Course Over Ground           Chart
                                  vector
 CTR                              Center of radar              Radar
 FLT                              Floating EBL/VRM             Radar
 GRD                              Guard zone                   Radar

32                                                                                                                             G-Series User reference
3.9 Home screen overview                                               Screen item   Description
The home screen provides a central point of access to your system's    1             Page -- each icon represents a page. A page can display
range of applications.                                                               up to 4 applications simultaneously.
It also provides quick access to your waypoints, routes, and tracks.   2             My Routes / My Tracks / My Waypoints -- these icons
Press the PAGE button at any time to access the home screen.                         enable you to centrally manage your lists of routes, tracks,
The home screen consists of a number of application "pages", each                    and waypoints.
represented by an icon. Applications can be started by selecting       3             Customize -- select this icon to configure application
the relevant page icon.                                                              pages.
Use the MORE softkeys to scroll the home screen and access
additional application pages.                                          4             More -- select this softkey to scroll the home screen and
                                                                                     access additional application pages.
           1                     2                     3       4




Getting started                                                                                                                                  33
3.10 Pages                                                                 Multiple applications
Pages are used on your multifunction display to show applications.         With most applications, it is possible to run 4 instances of the same
                                                                           application at any one time. However there are 2 exceptions to
Pages are displayed and accessed on the home screen. Each page             this, which are:
can display between 1 and 4 applications.
                                                                           · Chart application -- maximum 2 simultaneous instances per
Any page on the home screen can be customized, enabling you to               multifunction display.
group your applications into different pages, each designed for a
specific purpose. For example, you could have a page that includes         · Sirius satellite radio application -- maximum 1 instance per
the chart and fishfinder applications, suitable for fishing, and another     multifunction display, at any one time.
page that includes the chart and data applications, which would
                                                                           · Video application -- maximum 1 instance per multifunction
be suitable for general sailing.
                                                                             display, at any one time.
                                  Empty page. You can add any
                                  application(s) to any empty page.
                                                                           Moving a page on the home screen
                                                                           With the home screen displayed:
                                                                           1. Select the Customize icon.
                                                                           2. Select the page icon that you want to move.
                                                                           3. Select the SWAP PAGE softkey.
                                  Page featuring a single application.     4. Select the page icon that you want to swap positions with.
                                                                           5. Press the HOME button to return to the home screen featuring
                                                                              the new icon positions.

                                                                           Changing an existing page on the home screen
                                                                           With the home screen displayed:
                                  Page featuring multiple applications.    1. Select the Customize icon.
                                                                           2. Select the page icon that you want to change.
                                                                           3. Select the EDIT PAGE softkey.
                                                                           4. Select the appropriate page layout.
                                                                           5. Select the application(s) you want to display on the page.


You can also define a "layout" for each page, which determines how
                                                                           Adding a new page to the home screen
the applications are arranged on the screen.                               With the home screen displayed:

34                                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
1. Use the MORE softkey to scroll to a home screen that has space   3.11 Applications
   for new page icons.
2. Select the Customize icon.                                                           Chart application -- provides a 2D
   A number of empty page icons appear.                                                 or 3D graphical view of your charts to
                                                                                        help you navigate. Waypoint, route, and
3. Select an empty page icon.
                                                                                        track functions enable you to navigate
4. Select the EDIT PAGE softkey.                                                        to a specific location, build and navigate
5. Select the appropriate page layout.                                                  routes, or record where you've been.
6. Select the application(s) you want to display on the page.                           Upgrade your charts using chart cards to
                                                                                        enjoy higher levels of detail and 3D views.
Renaming a page on the home screen                                                      Fishfinder application -- with a suitable
                                                                                        Digital Sounder Module (DSM) and
With the home screen displayed:                                                         transducer, you can use the fishfinder
1. Select the Customize icon.                                                           application to help you accurately
2. Select the page that you want to rename.                                             distinguish between different sizes of
3. Select the RENAME PAGE softkey.                                                      fish, bottom structure, and underwater
                                                                                        obstacles. You can also view sea depth
   The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
                                                                                        and temperature data, and mark points of
4. Using the on-screen keyboard, enter the new name for the page.                       interest, such as fishing spots or wrecks.
5. Select SAVE.
                                                                                        Radar application -- with a suitable radar
                                                                                        scanner, you can use the radar application
Deleting a page from the home screen                                                    to track targets and measure distances
With the home screen displayed:                                                         and bearings. A number of automatic gain
                                                                                        presets and color modes are provided to
1. Select the CUSTOMIZE icon.                                                           help you get the best performance from
2. Select an existing page.                                                             your radar scanner.
3. Select the DELETE PAGE softkey.
4. Select YES to confirm deletion, or NO to cancel the operation.                       Engine application -- enables you to
                                                                                        view engine information in the form of
Resetting the home screen to default settings                                           gauges and digital data, from up to 3
                                                                                        compatible engines.
With the home screen displayed:
1. Select the Customize icon.
2. Select the RESET ALL PAGES TO DEFAULT softkey.
3. Select the YES softkey to reset the pages, or NO to cancel.
Getting started                                                                                                                   35
     Data application -- view system and            Weather application -- (North America
     instrument data on your multifunction          only). With a suitable weather receiver
     display, for a range of compatible             connected to your system, the weather
     instruments.                                   application overlays historical, live, and
                                                    forecasted weather graphics on a world
                                                    map.


     Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)               Video application -- view a video or
     application -- provides a graphical            camera source on your multifunction
     representation of your vessel's course in a    display. With the appropriate optional
     "rolling road" format, along with navigation   accessories, you can connect additional
     data.                                          video sources and switch between them.




     Sirius audio application -- (North
     America only). Use your multifunction
     display to control a connected Sirius
     Satellite Radio receiver.




36                                                                       G-Series User reference
3.12 Screen overview                                                              Screen item       Description
                                                                                  4                 Edit dialogs -- enable data to be edited or entered into a
        1         2   3             4            5                        6
                                                                                                    list -- for example, editing a waypoint..
                                                                                  5                 Pop-up messages -- alert you to a situation (such as an
                                                                                                    alarm), or unavailable function. Pop-up messages may
                                                                                                    require a response from you -- for example, press the
                                                                                                    ACKNOWLEDGE softkey to silence alarms.
                                                                                  6                 Softkeys -- used to select frequently-used options.


                                                                                 Using menus
                                                                                 Menus enable you to configure your system to your particular needs.
                                                                                 The following diagram shows the main features of a standard menu:

                                                                                                1                               2




 Screen item          Description
 1                    Databar -- provides information about your vessel and
                      its environment. The position and type of information in
                      the databar can be customized if required. The databar
                      also displays the status icons, which confirm the status
                      of externally-connected equipment, including GPS, AIS,
                      radar, and autopilot units.
 2                    Status bar -- provides information specific to each
                      application. This information cannot be edited or moved.
 3                    List dialogs -- include information you have added to
                      your multifunction display, such as waypoints.


Getting started                                                                                                                                               37
 Screen item      Description
                                                                                             1                           2                     3
 1                Menu item -- Use the trackpad or rotary control to
                  highlight an item, and the OK button to select it.
 2                Scroll bar -- indicates your position in the list. Use the
                  trackpad or rotary control to scroll the list.

 Note: Press the CANCEL button to go back to a previous menu.
 If a previous menu level is not available, pressing CANCEL exits
 the menu.


Using list dialogs
List dialogs enable you to view details of data items stored on your
system, such as waypoints, routes, and tracks.
The following diagram shows the main features of a typical list
dialog:


                                                                               Screen item       Description
                                                                               1                 List item -- use the trackpad or rotary control to highlight a
                                                                                                 list item. Use the available softkeys to access the functions
                                                                                                 for the list dialog.
                                                                               2                 Scroll bar -- indicates your position in the list. Use the
                                                                                                 trackpad or rotary control to scroll the list.
                                                                               3                 Details -- displays the details of the currently selected
                                                                                                 list item.

                                                                               Note: Press the CANCEL button to go back to a previous dialog.
                                                                               If a previous dialog is not available, pressing CANCEL exits the
                                                                               dialog.



38                                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
Using edit dialogs                                                              Note: Press the CANCEL button to go back to a previous dialog.
Edit dialogs enable you to edit the details of data items stored on             If a previous dialog is not available, pressing CANCEL exits the
your system, such as waypoints, routes, and tracks.                             current dialog.

The following diagram shows the main features of a typical edit
dialog:                                                                        Using control dialogs
                                                                               Control dialogs enable you to control externally connected
                            1                          2
                                                                               equipment, such as an autopilot unit.
                                                                               The following diagram shows a typical control dialog:

                                                                                                 1




 Screen item       Description
 1                 Text field -- use the trackpad or the rotary control to
                   highlight a field. Then press the OK button to select the
                   field and display the on-screen keyboard, which can be
                                                                                Screen item      Description
                   used to edit the details.
                                                                                1                Instructions -- tell you what softkeys to use for controlling
 2                 Numeric field -- use the trackpad or rotary control to
                                                                                                 the externally connected equipment.
                   highlight the field and then select theEDIT... softkey to
                   edit the details.

Getting started                                                                                                                                              39
Editing information in dialogs                                      3.13 Databar status symbols
With the dialog displayed:                                          The status symbols on the databar confirm whether the appropriate
1. Select the field you want to edit.                               connections to your system have been made.
   The on-screen keyboard is displayed:                             The symbols show the status for the following:
                                                                    · Radar scanner.
                                                                    · AIS receiver / transceiver.
                                                                    · Sonar (DSM).
                                                                    · GPS receiver.
                                                                    · Autopilot.

                                                                    Radar scanner status symbols
                                                                    The radar scanner power mode status is indicated in the databar.
                                                                                              Radar
                                                                                              power
                                                                     Symbol                   mode       Description
2. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the changes.                                            Transmit   Rotating icon, signifying that the
3. Use the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key to keep any changes.                                 (TX)       scanner is on and transmitting. When
                                                                                                         SCANNER is set to ON, select this
Entering special or accented characters                                                                  mode to activate the scanner. This is
With the on-screen keyboard displayed:                                                                   the usual mode of operation.
1. Select the on-screen keyboard's ŕčň key.                                                   Standby    Static icon, indicating that the scanner
2. Select the character you want to accent.                                                   (STBY)     is on but not transmitting, and the
                                                                                                         antenna is not rotating. The scanner
   The available accented characters are displayed above the text
                                                                                                         does not transmit and the radar data
   entry field.
                                                                                                         is removed from the screen. This is
3. For characters that have multiple available accents, use the                                          a power-save mode used when the
   character key to toggle between them.                                                                 radar is not needed for short time
4. Select the ŕčň key to enter the character.                                                            periods. When you return to transmit
                                                                                                         mode, the magnetron does not need
                                                                                                         to warm up again. This is the default
                                                                                                         mode.

40                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
                          Radar                                                   Symbol                    Description
                          power
 Symbol                   mode       Description                                                            AIS unit is in Silent Mode.

                          Off        Scanner powered off when radar not
                                     required, but display is in use for other
                                     applications, such as the chart. When                                  AIS unit is in Silent Mode, with active alarms.
                                     selected, the system counts down.
                                     During this time you cannot re-power
                                     the scanner.
                                                                                                            AIS unit is connected and switched on, but has
                          Timed      Scanner switches between                                               active alarms.
                          Transmit   on/transmitting, and standby
                                     mode. Scanner goes into power save
                                     mode when constant use of radar is
                                                                                                            AIS unit is connected and switched on, but the
                                     not required.
                                                                                                            dangerous and lost alarm is disabled.

AIS status symbols
AIS status is indicated by a symbol in the databar.                              Sonar status symbols
 Symbol                    Description                                           The sonar (DSM) status is indicated in the databar.
                           AIS unit is switched on and operating.                 Symbol                             Description
                                                                                                                     Symbol animated: the DSM is
                                                                                                                     connected and transmitting.
                           AIS currently unavailable.

                                                                                                                     Symbol static: the DSM is connected
                                                                                                                     but not transmitting.
                           AIS unit is switched off, or not connected.

                                                                                                                     Symbol greyed-out: the DSM is not
                                                                                                                     connected, or is not detected.




Getting started                                                                                                                                               41
GPS status symbols                                                         Symbol   Description
The GPS receiver status is indicated in the databar.                                Autopilot alarm active.
 Symbol                              Description
                                     A GPS receiver is connected and has
                                     obtained a fix.                                Dodge mode is active.


                                     A GPS receiver is not connected, or
                                     cannot obtain a fix.                           Fish mode is active.



Autopilot status symbols                                                            Autopilot calibration.

The autopilot status is indicated in the databar.
 Symbol                     Description                                             Power steering active.
                            Autopilot is in Standby mode.


                                                                                    Wind Vane mode is active.
                            Autopilot is in Track mode.



                            Autopilot is in Auto mode.



                            No autopilot detected.




42                                                                                                            G-Series User reference
3.14 Initial setup procedures                                       2. Select System Setup.
                                                                    3. Select Boat Details.
A number of tasks should be completed before you use your system
for the first time.                                                 4. Change the Safe Depth, Safe Height and Safe Width settings
                                                                       as appropriate for your vessel.
Once your system has been installed and commissioned (see
Installation instructions), Raymarine recommends that you:           Note: The settings you specify for your vessel details are
· Set the language, the date and time format and preferred units     essential for the accurate operation of the collision alarm. You
  of measurement.                                                    must specify vessel detail settings that are appropriate for safe
                                                                     navigation.
· Set your vessel details.
· Adjust the display brightness.                                     Note: The collision alarm uses data from the GPS antenna in its
· Designate the data master (master GPM).                            calculations. Therefore the values you specify for your vessel
                                                                     detail settings must reflect the actual position of the GPS antenna
· Select the GPS data source.                                        on your vessel. For example, the "Safe Width" setting is actually
· Familiarize yourself with the Simulator Mode.                      the diameter either side of the GPS antenna, so if you have a
                                                                     vessel 4 meters wide and you enter a minimum "Safe Width" of 4
                                                                     meters, this is actually providing a collision zone of only 2 meters
Setting the language, time / date, and units of                      either side of the GPS antenna. If the GPS antenna is mounted
measurement                                                          on the port side of the vessel and you specified a Safe Width of 4
                                                                     meters, you would be leaving 2 meters of the hull uncovered by
1. Press the MENU button.                                            the collision zone.
2. Select System Setup.
3. Select Language.
4. Select the appropriate language from the list.
                                                                    Adjusting the display brightness
5. Select Time / Date Setup.                                        1. Press the POWER button once.
6. Use the Date Format and Time Format menu items to adjust            The Backlight Level control is displayed.
   the date and time.                                               2. Using the rotary control, adjust the brightness level as
7. Use the Cancel button to return to the System Setup menu.           appropriate.
8. Select Units Setup.                                              3. To switch the color palette between Day (very bright) and Night
9. Make the appropriate changes using the menu items in the Units      (dark) modes, select MENU > Display Setup > Palette.
   Setup Menu.

Setting your vessel details
1. Press the MENU button.
Getting started                                                                                                                          43
Data master (master GPM)                                             3. Select the Set Master GPM option.
If your system features more than one GPM processor unit you must       A list of available connected GPM processors is displayed, with
designate one GPM processor as the data master (master GPM).            serial numbers. The Local GPM refers to the GPM to which the
                                                                        monitor is physically connected.
If the data master has not already been designated as part of the    4. Select the processor you want to designate as the data master.
installation and commissioning process it must be done as part of
the initial setup.                                                   5. Select the SET AS MASTER softkey.

The data master handles all the data from the various marine          Note: If you are unsure of which GPM to select use the
electronics installed around your vessel. The data master receives    DISCOVER GPM softkey, which shows a message on every
data from SeaTalk and SeaTalkng and transmits it to the relevant      monitor identifying the GPM to which it is connected.
components of the G-Series system via the SeaTalkhs network.
For example the system may require heading information from the
autopilot and GPS systems, usually received through a SeaTalkng or
                                                                     Selecting the GPS data source
NMEA connection. The data master is the GPM processor to which       1.   Press the MENU button.
the SeaTalk, NMEA and any other data connections are made, it        2.   Select System Setup.
then bridges the data to the SeaTalkhs network and any compatible    3.   Select System Integration.
repeat displays. Information shared by the data master includes:
                                                                     4.   Select Preferred GPS Source.
· Cartography                                                        5.   Select the type of data input that is supplying your preferred
                                                                          source of GPS data (SeaTalkng/NMEA2000, SeaTalk1, or
· Routes and waypoints
                                                                          NMEA0183).
· Radar
· Sonar                                                              Simulator mode
· Data received from the autopilot, instruments, the engine and      The Simulator mode enables you to practice operating your display
  other external sources.                                            without data from a GPS antenna, radar scanner, AIS unit, or
                                                                     fishfinder.
 Note: The GPM processor that you choose to be the master            The simulator mode is switched on/off in the System Setup Menu.
 GPM must be the unit to which the SeaTalk and SeaTalkng buses       You can also adjust the vessel speed in simulator mode. This is
 are physically connected.                                           useful for quickly moving to different areas of the chart, for example.

Designating the data master (master GPM)                              Note: Raymarine recommends that you do NOT use the
                                                                      simulator mode whilst navigating.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the System Configuration menu item.                         Note: The simulator will NOT display any real data, including any
                                                                      safety messages (such as those received from AIS units).

44                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
 Note: Any system settings made whilst in Simulator mode are not
 transmitted via SeaTalk to other equipment.

Enabling the simulator mode
1. Press Menu.
2. Select the System Setup menu.
3. Select the Simulator item, and change its value to On.

Adjusting the simulator vessel speed
1.   Press the MENU button.
2.   Select System Setup.
3.   Select Simulator Speed.
4.   Select the appropriate speed.




Getting started                                                    45
46   G-Series User reference
Chapter 4: Managing display data

Chapter contents
·    4.1 Memory cards overview on page 48
·    4.2 Inserting a memory card, chart card, or CF / microSD card adaptor on page 48
·    4.3 Ensure chart card door is securely closed on page 49
·    4.4 Removing a memory card, chart card, or CF / microSD adaptor on page 49
·    4.5 Saving user data and user settings on page 50
·    4.6 Transferring data using NMEA on page 51
·    4.7 Resetting your system on page 52




Managing display data                                                                   47
4.1 Memory cards overview                                             4.2 Inserting a memory card, chart card,
You can use memory cards to archive data such as waypoints,
                                                                      or CF / microSD card adaptor
routes, and tracks.
                                                                      1. Check that you are using the correct type of card.
Memory cards can be used to archive your data when the system         2. Open the chart card door, located on the top of the GPM
capacity is reached. You can then delete old data from your system,      processor unit.
creating capacity for new data. The archived data can be retrieved
at any time. You can also use memory cards to backup your data.       3. Insert the card or CF / microSD card adaptor, as shown in
                                                                         the diagram below, with the lip of the card or adaptor facing
 Note: Raymarine recommends that you backup your data to a               outwards. It should position easily. If it does not, DO NOT force
 memory card on a regular basis.                                         it, check the direction in which the lip is facing.
                                                                      4. Gently press the card or adaptor all the way in to the card slot.
                                                                      5. If using a microSD card, gently insert it into the adaptor, using
                                                                         the correct orientation.
                                                                      6. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close
                                                                         the chart card door, pressing firmly to ensure it is fully closed.




                                                                                                                                        D11530-1




48                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
4.3 Ensure chart card door is securely                           4.4 Removing a memory card, chart
closed                                                           card, or CF / microSD adaptor
Prevent water ingress.                                           1. If the system is powered on, press the MENU button. Otherwise,
                                                                    skip to Step 3.
To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to the display,
ensure that the chart card door is firmly closed. This can be    2. Select the Remove CF Card menu option.
confirmed by an audible click.                                      A message is displayed, confirming that it is safe to remove the
                                                                    card.
                                                                 3. Open the chart card door.
                                                                 4. Carefully remove the card. If your system features a physical
                                                                    card eject button this MUST be used.
                                                                 5. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close
                                                                    the chart card door and press firmly until a click is heard.




Managing display data                                                                                                             49
4.5 Saving user data and user settings                                           Saving user settings to a memory card
You can save user data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) or user                    Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you save settings
settings to a memory card for later retrieval.                                    to a separate memory card, and NOT to a chart card containing
                                                                                  cartography.
 Type of data            Description                Notes
                                                                                 1.   Insert card in to the card slot.
 User data (waypoints)   Saves all waypoints to a   Only 1 waypoints archive     2.   Select the DATA button.
                         single archive file.       file can be saved per
                                                                                 3.   Select the SAVE AND RETRIEVE SETTINGS softkey.
                                                    memory card.
                                                                                 4.   Select the SAVE TO CARD softkey.
 User data (routes)      Saves all routes to a      Only 1 routes archive
                         single archive file.       file can be saved per
                                                    memory card.                 Retrieving user settings from a memory card
 User data (tracks)      Saves all tracks to a      Only 1 tracks archive         Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you save settings
                         single archive file.       file can be saved per         to a separate memory card, NOT to a chart card containing
                                                    memory card.                  cartography.

 User settings           Saves the settings         You can save 1 user          1.   Insert card in to the card slot.
                         you've made in the         settings archive file        2.   Select the DATA button.
                         Setup Menus to a single    per memory card for          3.   Select the SAVE AND RETRIEVE SETTINGS softkey.
                         archive file.              each product Series          4.   Select the RETRIEVE FROM CARD softkey. This option is only
                                                    (C-Series, E-Series,              available if a suitable memory card containing a system settings
                                                    or G-Series). However,            archive file is in the card slot.
                                                    you can NOT retrieve the
                                                    settings from a Series
                                                    to a different Series (for   Saving data to a memory card
                                                    example, G-Series to
                                                    E-Series).                    Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you save data to
                                                                                  a separate memory card, and NOT to a chart card containing
                                                                                  cartography.
 Note: Raymarine recommends that you save your user data and
 user settings to a memory card on a regular basis.                              1.   Insert card in to the card slot.
                                                                                 2.   Select the DATA button.
                                                                                 3.   Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
                                                                                 4.   Select the SAVE TO CARD softkey.
                                                                                 5.   Use the SELECT LIST softkey to select the type of data that you
                                                                                      want to save (Waypoint, Route, or Track).

50                                                                                                                                 G-Series User reference
6. To save all items of that type of data, select the SAVE ALL...          4.6 Transferring data using NMEA
   softkey.
7. To save an individual item of data, select the item from the list       You can transfer waypoints or routes to and from your multifunction
   and select the SAVE... softkey.                                         display and an external instrument, using NMEA.


Retrieving data from a memory card                                         Transferring waypoint and route data using
1. Insert card in to the card slot.
                                                                           NMEA
2. Press the DATA button.                                                  With NMEA-compatible equipment powered on and connected to
                                                                           your system:
3. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
                                                                           1. Press the DATA button.
4. Select the RETRIEVE FROM CARD softkey.
                                                                           2. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
5. Use the SELECT LIST softkey to select the type of data that you
   want to save (Waypoint, Route, or Track).                               3. Select the TRANSFER ON NMEA softkey.
6. To retrieve all items of that type of data, press the RETRIEVE          4. Select the SEND WPTS ON NMEA, SEND RTES ON NMEA, or
   ALL... softkey.                                                            RECEIVE ON NMEA softkey, as appropriate.
7. To retrieve an individual item of data, select the item from the list    Note: Select the STOP TRANSFER softkey at any time to abort
   and select the RETRIEVE... softkey.                                      the transfer operation.
 Note: If the type of data you have selected already exists in the
 system memory, use the softkeys to select a suitable action:
 retrieve as new data, replace existing data, or cancel.


Erasing data from a memory card
1. Insert the card in to the card slot.
2. Press the DATA button.
3. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
4. Select the ERASE FROM CARD softkey.
5. Use the SELECT LIST softkey to select the type of data you
   want to erase.
6. To erase all the data, select the ERASE ALL... softkey.
7. To erase an individual item of data from the list, highlight the
   relevant entry in the list and select the ERASE... softkey.

Managing display data                                                                                                                       51
4.7 Resetting your system                                                 Performing a settings reset
                                                                          1. Press the MENU button.
Your system may be reset to its factory default settings if required.
                                                                          2. Select System Setup.
There are 2 types of reset operation, both of which affect the current
display you are using, AND any networked displays.                        3. Select Settings Reset.
                                                                          4. If you have password-protected your waypoints, enter your
· Settings reset.                                                            waypoint password and press the OK button.
· Settings and data reset.                                                5. Select the YES option to perform the reset, or select the NO
                                                                             option to abort.
Settings reset
This option resets your setup menus, page sets, and databar               Performing a settings and data reset
settings to factory default. It will NOT affect your waypoints, routes,
or tracks data.                                                           Performing a settings and data reset erases ALL waypoints, routes,
                                                                          and track data from your system. BEFORE proceeding with a
Settings and data reset                                                   settings and data reset, ensure that you backup any data that you
In addition to the settings reset detailed above, performing a settings   want to keep on to a memory card.
and data reset will also remove ALL waypoints, routes, and tracks         1. Press the MENU button.
data.                                                                     2. Select System Setup.
                                                                          3. Select Settings and Data Reset.
             Caution: Loss of Nav Station settings                        4. If your waypoints have password protection, enter your waypoint
             When you perform a settings and data reset on a                  password and press the OK button.
             G-Series system you will lose all your Nav Station           5. Select the YES option to perform the reset, or select NO to abort.
             settings. This means that any associations set up
             between the monitors and keyboards in your system
             will be lost. These settings are usually recorded at
             the time of your initial system installation, using the
             "installation schematic" diagrams that accompany the
             Installation handbook. Your dealer or installer should
             refer to these settings to restore the Nav Station
             configurations. If you do NOT have these settings
             recorded you should NOT perform a settings and data
             reset. Contact your dealer or Raymarine technical
             support for further guidance.



52                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
Chapter 5: Using waypoints, routes and tracks

Chapter contents
·    5.1 Waypoints on page 54
·    5.2 Routes on page 64
·    5.3 Tracks on page 69
·    5.4 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage capacity on page 71




Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                  53
5.1 Waypoints                                                            By default, all waypoints are indicated on screen by a waypoint
                                                                         symbol (x). You can assign different symbols if required.
A waypoint is a position marked on the screen to indicate a site
or a place to navigate to.                                               Waypoints in the radar application
As well as acting as position markers, waypoints are also the            In the chart and radar applications both active and inactive
building blocks used to create routes.                                   waypoints are shown. The active waypoint (i.e. the one to which
Common waypoint functions are accessed using the waypoints               you are heading) has a box placed around the symbol to highlight it.
softkey toolbar. This can be shown at any time by pressing the
WPTS MOB button.

Waypoint display examples
Waypoints on the chart
In the chart applications both active and inactive waypoints are
shown. The active waypoint (i.e. the one to which you are heading)
has a box placed around the symbol to highlight it.



                                                1                                                     D11759-1


                                                                         By default, all waypoints are indicated on screen by a waypoint
                                                                         symbol (x). You can assign different symbols if required.
                              2
          3                                                              Waypoints in the CDI application
                                                                         In the CDI application, a waypoint is represented only when it is
                                                                         active.

                                                              D11761-1



 Item           Description
 1              Inactive waypoint
 2              Active waypoint
 3              Alternative waypoint symbols

54                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
                                                                           · Erase waypoint.
                                                                           · Move waypoint.
                                                                           · Go to waypoint.
                                                                           · View / edit waypoint.

                                                                           Waypoint features
                                                                           There are a range of features for placing, navigating and managing
                                                                           waypoints.

                                                                D11760-1
                                                                           Waypoint features are accessed from:
                                                                           · the chart or radar application -- by positioning the cursor over
Waypoints in the fishfinder application                                      an existing waypoint on the screen.
Waypoints in the fishfinder application are represented by a vertical
line labelled WPT. This symbol cannot be changed.                          · any application -- by pressing the WPTS MOB button. This
                                                                             displays the waypoint toolbar
                                     WPT                                   · the home screen -- by pressing the WPTS MOB button or
                                                                             selecting the My Waypoints icon. This displays the waypoints list.
                                                                           The following table lists the waypoint functions you can access at
                                     WPT                                   any time, from all applications and the home screen:
                                                                            Waypoint function                   All applications   Home screen
                                     WPT                                    Placing a waypoint

                                                                            Displaying waypoint information
                                     WPT                                    (Waypoint list)
                                                                D11745-1

                                                                            Navigate to a waypoint
Waypoint hotspots
                                                                            Edit waypoint information
Placing the cursor over a waypoint in the chart or radar applications
displays a pop-up showing the waypoint's basic information.
Selecting a waypoint hotspot also provides the following the softkey        Edit waypoint appearance / symbol
functions:
Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                               55
 Waypoint function                  All applications   Home screen       Placing a waypoint at a known position

 Move waypoints                                                           Note: By default the system will use Lat/Lon coordinates. If
                                                                          required you can use Loran TD coordinates instead. Use the
                                                                          System Setup Menu to set the position mode appropriately.
 Creating and managing waypoint
 groups                                                                  1.   Press the WPTS MOB button.
 Displaying and managing waypoint                                        2.   Select the WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON softkey.
 groups                                                                  3.   Select the EDIT USING KEYPAD softkey.
 Move a waypoint between groups                                          4.   Enter the Latitude/Longitude position.
                                                                         5.   Select SAVE.
                                                                         6.   Close the window.
Waypoint placement
                                                                         Waypoint navigation
Placing a waypoint at the cursor position
In the chart, radar, fishfinder, or CDI application:                     Navigating to the cursor position on the chart
1. Press the WPTS MOB button.
2. Move the cursor to the area of the screen where you want the
    waypoint to be placed.
3. Select the WAYPOINT AT CURSOR softkey.
4. (Optionally) select the waypoint Name, Group, or Symbol field to
    customize the waypoint details. Then select SAVE.

Placing a waypoint at your vessel's position
In addition to positional information, a waypoint placed at the vessel
position will capture temperature and sounded depth information (if
you have the appropriate sensors connected to your system).                                                                                   D11764-1

In the chart, radar, fishfinder, or CDI application:
                                                                         In   the chart application:
1. Press the WPTS MOB button.
                                                                         1.    Position the cursor at the desired destination on the chart.
2. Select the WAYPOINT AT VESSEL softkey.
                                                                         2.    Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
3. (Optionally) select the waypoint Name, Group, or Symbol field to
    customize the waypoint details. Then select SAVE.                    3.    Select the GOTO CURSOR softkey.


56                                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
Navigating to a waypoint on the screen                                 4. Alternatively, in the chart application, position the cursor over the
                                                                          active waypoint, and select the STOP GOTO softkey.
                                                                        Note: Once navigation is no longer active, the waypoint symbol
                                                                        returns to its normal unboxed state, and the dashed line between
                                                                        your vessel and the waypoint is removed.


                                                                       Waypoint information
                                                                       When you create a waypoint, the system assigns a number of pieces
                                                                       of information regarding the location marked. You can view and edit
                                                                       the details of any waypoint that has been created and stored.
                                                                       The following information is assigned or captured for each waypoint:
                                                            D11753-1
                                                                       · Name
In the chart or radar application:
                                                                       · Position (as Lat/Lon and range/bearing from vessel)
1. Place the cursor over the waypoint.
    The softkeys change to show the waypoint options.                  · Temperature (requires appropriate sensor, only for waypoints
                                                                         captured at the vessel position)
2. Select the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.
    The required course heading to the waypoint is shown on the        · Depth (requires appropriate sensor, only for waypoints captured
    screen.                                                              at the vessel position)
                                                                       · Date and time
 Note: You can select the STOP GOTO softkey at any time to
 cancel the action.                                                    · Comment -- You can add your own text comments to a waypoint.
                                                                       · Symbol -- A default symbol is assigned, or you can select an
Navigating to a waypoint in the Waypoints List                           alternative.
1. Press the WPTS/MOB button, or select the Navigation softkey         There are 2 features which allow you to view or edit waypoint
   in the chart window.                                                information:
2. Select the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.                           · Place the cursor over a waypoint hotspot on the 2D chart or Radar
3. Select the required waypoint from the list.                           screen to view selected information.
4. Select the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.                                   · Use the waypoint list for comprehensive information to view and
                                                                         edit as required.
Cancelling navigation to a waypoint
1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.                                          Displaying the waypoint list
2. Select the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.                           1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
3. Select the STOP GOTO softkey.                                       2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                          57
Waypoint editing                                                      Symbol   Type              Symbol   Type
Editing waypoint details                                                       Caution                    Circle
With the Waypoint List displayed:
1. Select the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.                                   Concrete                   Diamond
   The Edit Waypoint dialog is displayed.
2. Select the field you want to change.                                        Diamond quarter            Diver down
3. Select the EDIT... softkey to display the on-screen keyboard.
                                                                               Diver down                 Dolphin
4. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the changes, then select                 (alternative)
   the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.
                                                                               Dot                        Dotted square
Editing a waypoint on the chart or radar screen
In the chart or radar application:                                             End marker                 Fad
1. Place the cursor over the waypoint.
    The softkeys change to show the waypoint options.                          Fish                       Fish (1­star)
2. Select the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
    The Edit Waypoint dialog is displayed.                                     Fish (2­star)              Fish (3­star)
3. Select the field you want to edit.
                                                                               Fish trap                  Hill peak
4. Use the EDIT... softkey to display the on-screen keyboard.
5. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the changes, and then
                                                                               Ledge                      Lobster
    select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.
Waypoint symbols                                                               Lost target                Man overboard (MOB)
There are a range of symbols to represent different waypoint types.
                                                                               Marker                     Martini
 Symbol      Type                Symbol      Type
             Airport                         Anchor                            NMEA                       Nuns

             Billfish                        Bottom mark                       Oil rig                    Oyster

             Bridge                          Buoy                              Post                       Preferred marks

             Cans                            Car


58                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
 Symbol         Type                 Symbol   Type             Showing and hiding waypoint names
                                                               In the chart, radar, fishfinder, or CDI application:
                Private reef                  Public reef
                                                               1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
                Reef                          Reef ball        2. Select the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
                                                               3. Select the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.
                Restriction                   Rocks            4. Using the WAYPOINT NAME softkey, select the WAYPOINT
                                                                   NAME ON option to show waypoint names, or the WAYPOINT
                Sail boat                     School of fish       NAME OFF option to hide waypoint names.
                                                                Note: Waypoints in an active route are always displayed,
                SeaTalk                       Seaweed           regardless of whether the display is set to show or hide.

                Shark                         Skull            Showing and hiding waypoint groups / symbols
                                                               In the chart, radar, fishfinder, or CDI application:
                Small fish                    Sport fisher
                                                               1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
                Square                        Start marker     2. Select the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey.
                                                               3. Select the SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS softkey.
                Swimming                      Tank             4. Using the SHOW BY softkey, select the SHOW BY GROUP or
                                                                   SHOW BY SYM option, as appropriate.
                Top mark                      Tower                A list of available waypoint groups or symbols is displayed.
                                                               5. Select the waypoint group or symbol that you want to show or
                Trawler                       Tree                 hide.
                                                               6. Using the ON CHART softkey, select the SHOW or HIDE option,
                Triangle                      Wreck                as appropriate.
                                                               7. Repeat Steps 5 to 6 for each waypoint group or symbol you want
                                                                   to show or hide.
Changing a waypoint symbol
With the Waypoint List displayed:                              Moving waypoints
1. Select the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.
                                                               Moving a waypoint on the chart or radar screen
   The Edit Waypoint dialog is displayed.
                                                               In the chart or radar application:
2. Select the Symbol field.
                                                               1. Move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
3. Select the required symbol in the list.
                                                                   The softkeys change to provide waypoint options.
Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                            59
2. Select the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey.                                    3. Select the YES softkey to confirm.
3. Select the new position for the waypoint.
                                                                         Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If
4. Select the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.                                    you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning is
Moving a waypoint within a route                                         displayed, and the waypoint cannot be erased.
In the chart application:
                                                                        Erasing all waypoints
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint you want to move.
    The softkeys change to provide waypoint options.                    1. Press the DATA button.
2. Select the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey.                                    2. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
3. Move the cursor so that it stretches the leg of the route to the     3. Select the ERASE FROM SYSTEM softkey.
    desired position on the chart.                                      4. Use the SELECT LIST softkey to select the WPT option.
4. Select the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.                                   5. Select the ERASE ALL WAYPOINTS softkey.
                                                                        6. Select the YES softkey to confirm, or the NO softkey to cancel.
Moving a waypoint by entering new coordinates
With the Waypoint List displayed:                                        Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If
1. Select the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey.                             you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning is
                                                                         displayed, and the waypoint cannot be erased.
   The Edit Waypoint dialog is displayed.
2. Select the Position, Bearing, or RNG field, as appropriate.
3. Use the rotary control to enter the new coordinates, or select the   Waypoint groups
   EDIT USING KEYPAD softkey and use the on-screen keyboard.
                                                                        In order to make your waypoints easier to manage, you can organize
                                                                        them into groups of your choice. When fishing, for example, you
Erasing waypoints                                                       may only wish to see the waypoints that indicate good fishing sites.
Erasing a waypoint on screen                                            Provided that you have not changed the default group, all waypoints
                                                                        are automatically placed in the default "My Waypoints" group when
In the chart or radar application:                                      they are created.
1. Move the cursor to the relevant waypoint.
    The softkey toolbar changes to show the waypoint options.            Note: A waypoint can only belong to one group.
2. Select the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey.
3. Select the YES softkey to confirm, or NO softkey to cancel.          Displaying the waypoint group list
                                                                        1. Press the WPTS MOB button. or select My Waypoints from
Erasing a waypoint using the waypoint list                                 the home screen.
With the Waypoint List displayed:                                       2. Select the MANAGE SYMBOLS AND GROUPS softkey.
1. Highlight the waypoint you want to erase.                            The Waypoint Group List is displayed.
2. Select the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey.                                   You can now:

60                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
· Make a new waypoint group.                                           3. Select the EDIT GROUP NAME softkey.
· Move waypoints between groups.                                          The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
· Rename groups.                                                       4. Using the on-screen keyboard, edit the group name.
                                                                       5. Select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.
· Erase groups.
                                                                       Changing the default waypoint group
Making a new waypoint group
                                                                       With the Waypoint Group List displayed:
With the Waypoint Group List displayed:
                                                                       1. Select the SET DEFAULT SYM & GROUP softkey.
1. Select the MAKE NEW GROUP softkey.
                                                                       2. Select the EDIT DEFAULT softkey.
2. Select the name field.
                                                                       3. Select the waypoint group that you want to make the default.
   The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
                                                                       4. Press the OK button.
3. Edit the name.
4. Select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.                           Erasing a waypoint group
                                                                       When you delete a waypoint group, the group name and all the
Moving waypoints between groups                                        associated waypoints are erased from the system. If a group
With the Waypoint Group List displayed:                                contains one or more waypoints that you want to keep, move these
1. Select the appropriate waypoint group from the list.                waypoints out of the group before deleting the waypoint group. You
2. Select the MOVE BETWEEN GROUPS softkey.                             can erase any waypoint group except the following:
3. Select the SELECT GROUP A softkey.                                  · the `My Waypoints' group,
4. Using the rotary control, select the waypoint group that contains   · a group containing an active waypoint,
   the waypoint you want to move.
                                                                       · a group that contains waypoints that are part of a stored route.
5. Press the OK button.
6. Highlight the Group B column.                                       With the Waypoint Group List displayed:
7. If the Group B column does not contain the waypoint group you       1. Select the waypoint group that you want to erase.
   want to move your waypoint to, select the SELECT GROUP B            2. Select the ERASE GROUP softkey.
   softkey, and use the rotary control to select the required group.   3. Select YES to confirm the action, or NO to cancel.
8. In the Group A column, select the waypoint you want to move.
9. Select the MOVE WAYPOINT FROM A TO B softkey.                       Managing waypoints
The waypoint is moved to the new group.                                Your system features a number of functions to help you manage
Renaming a waypoint group                                              your waypoints effectively.
With the Waypoint Group List displayed:                                You can:
1. Select the group you want to rename.                                · Archive waypoints to a memory card, for backup purposes.
2. Select the RENAME GROUP softkey.                                    · Transfer your waypoints to other NMEA compatible equipment.
Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                          61
· Add password protection to your waypoints to prevent                4. Select the appropriate port number, using the NMEA PORT
  unauthorized access.                                                   softkey.
                                                                      5. Set your third-party NMEA compatible device to receive mode.
Archiving waypoints to a memory card
                                                                      6. Select the SEND WPTS ON NMEA softkey on your multifunction
You can archive your waypoints to a memory card for backup               display.
purposes.
You can choose to save all of your waypoints, or just a specific      Receiving waypoints on NMEA
waypoint group.                                                       1. Press the DATA button.
 Note: DO NOT save data (waypoints, routes, and so on) to a           2. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
 chart card, as the charts may be overwritten.                        3. Select the TRANSFER ON NMEA softkey.
1.   Insert a memory card in the card slot.                           4. Select the appropriate port number using the NMEA PORT
                                                                         softkey.
2.   Press the DATA button.
                                                                      5. Set your third-party NMEA compatible device to transmit mode.
3.   Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.
                                                                      6. Select the RECEIVE ON NMEA softkey on your multifunction
4.   Select the SAVE TO CARD softkey.
                                                                         display.
5.   Select the WPT option using the SELECT LIST softkey.
6.   To save all waypoints, select the SAVE ALL softkey.              Password protecting your waypoints
7.   To save a specific waypoint group and its waypoints, highlight   You can prevent access to, modification, and visibility of your
     the group in the list and then select the SAVE GROUP softkey.    waypoints and routes by applying a password.
Waypoint transfer (NMEA)                                              Password Confirmation
You can send and receive waypoints to and from other NMEA             When Password Protection is enabled and you are attempting to
compatible devices.                                                   access a password protected function for the first time during a
                                                                      power-cycle, the system will request confirmation of your password
 Note: If the system receives an active waypoint over SeaTalk         before you can:
 or NMEA, it is displayed but cannot be edited. Waypoints
 received over SeaTalk are distinguished by an "S" waypoint           · Access WPTS key functions. This does not affect the operation of
 icon. Waypoints received over NMEA are distinguished by an             the MOB function.
 "N" waypoint icon.                                                   · Access ROUTE softkey functions.

Sending waypoints on NMEA                                             · Create a route from a track. All other track functions are
                                                                        unaffected.
1. Press the DATA button.
2. Select the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey.                           · Archive or transfer any waypoints.
3. Select the TRANSFER ON NMEA softkey.                               · Enter the Waypoint Password Setup menu.

62                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
 Note: Once you have provided a password to the system, it must     7. Enter the password (1 to 16 characters, and case sensitive).
 be entered to access the Password Setup sub-menu, regardless       8. Press the OK button.
 of the whether Password Protection is set to ON or OFF.            9. Repeat Steps 7 to 8 to confirm the password.
                                                                    10. Add a hint to help you remember the password (optional).
 Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you backup your
 waypoint data BEFORE password protecting your waypoints.           11. Press the OK button.
 This is so that, in the event that you forget your password, you   The password is now set and protection enabled, although access
 can easily restore your waypoints.                                 to the waypoint and route functions remains available until you
                                                                    restart your multifunction display.
Disabled Data/Functions
                                                                    Changing the waypoints password
When Password Protection is ON and you have not entered a
password, you will NOT be able to:                                  1.   Press the MENU button.
                                                                    2.   Select the System Setup menu item.
· View details of waypoint and route databases.
                                                                    3.   Select the Waypoint Password Setup menu item.
· Edit waypoints or routes.                                         4.   Select the Change Password menu item.
· Goto an existing waypoint.                                        5.   Enter your new waypoints password (1 to 16 characters, and
                                                                         case sensitive).
· Follow a route.
                                                                    6.   Press the OK button.
· View waypoints on screen (even when the SHOW/HIDE status          7.   Repeat Steps 5 to 6 to confirm the password.
  is set to SHOW).
                                                                    8.   Enter a hint to help you remember the password (optional).
· View waypoint names on screen (even when WAYPOINT NAME            9.   Press the OK button.
  is set to ON).
All other options including GOTO CURSOR are unaffected.             Disabling password protection for waypoints
                                                                    1.   Press the MENU button.
Specifying a password for waypoints
                                                                    2.   Select the System Setup menu item.
1.   Press the MENU button.                                         3.   Select the Waypoint Password Setup menu item.
2.   Select the System Setup menu item.                             4.   When prompted, enter your existing waypoints password.
3.   Select the Waypoint Password Setup menu item.                  5.   Press the OK button.
4.   Select the ON option for the Enable Password menu item.        6.   Select the OFF option for the Enable Password menu item
5.   Press the OK button.                                           7.   Press the OK button.
6.   Read the displayed warning, and press the YES softkey to
     accept it, as appropriate.

Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                    63
5.2 Routes                                                                 · Build and save a route for use when required (stored in the route
                                                                             list).
A route is a series of waypoints typically used to assist with passage     · Navigate (follow) routes.
planning and navigation.
                                                                           · Manage and edit routes stored on the system.
A route is displayed on screen as a series of waypoints linked by a
line.                                                                      You can also build a route from an existing track. Select the My
                                                                           Tracks icon to access track functions on the home screen.

                                                                           Route building
                                                                           A route can consist of a combination of:
                                                                           · New waypoints which you place on the screen as required and/or
                                                                           · existing waypoints selected from a list displayed on screen.
                                                                            Note: A route can also be created from a track.
                                                                           As each waypoint is added, it is assigned an index number
                                                                           corresponding to its position in the route and drawn on the chart
                                                                D11750-1   using the currently specified symbol. The following should be noted:
                                                                           · When a route is being built it is not active and does not affect
Route features                                                               any current navigation.
                                                                           · You cannot save a new route if any of the waypoints within it are
There are a range of route features for building, navigating and
                                                                             currently active.
managing routes.
Route features are accessed from:                                          Building a route on the chart
                                                                           In the chart application:
· the chart application -- by positioning the cursor over an
  existing route on the chart.                                             1. Select the PLANNING softkey.
                                                                           2. Select the BUILD NEW ROUTE softkey.
· the chart application -- by using the Navigation Options
  softkey.                                                                 3. Select the desired position on the chart for either a new or an
                                                                               existing waypoint as required.
· the home screen -- by selecting My Routes. This displays the             4. Select the appropriate option on the softkey toolbar:
  Routes list.
                                                                              · To use an existing waypoint select the USE THIS WAYPOINT
The route features allow you to:                                                softkey.
· Build a temporary route for immediate use (Quick Route).                    · For a new waypoint select the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.

64                                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
5. Repeat Steps 3 to 4 for each subsequent waypoint, until the
   route is complete.
6. To follow the route immediately without saving it for future use
   (Quick Route), select the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.
7. To save the route for future use, press the SAVE ROUTE softkey.

 Note: If you place a waypoint at the wrong position, press the
 UNDO WAYPOINT softkey.

Building a route using the waypoint list
Inthe chart application:                                              D11752-1

1. Select the PLANNING softkey.
2. Select the BUILD NEW ROUTE softkey.                                 Note: If a track break occurs, only the last segment is converted
                                                                       to a route.
3. Select the USE WAYPOINT LIST softkey.
4. Highlight the waypoint you want to use from the waypoint list.
                                                                      Building a route from a track
5. Select the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                      In the chart application:
6. Repeat Steps 4 to 5 for each existing waypoint you want to add     1. Select the PLANNING softkey.
   to the route, until the route is complete.
                                                                      2. Select the MY TRACKS softkey.
7. To follow the route immediately without saving it for future use
   (Quick Route), select the FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.                 The Track List is displayed.
                                                                      3. Select the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.
8. To save the route for future use, select the SAVE ROUTE softkey.
                                                                      4. Highlight the required track in the list.
Build a route from a track                                            5. Select the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.
You can create a route from a recorded track.                         6. Select the YES softkey to name the route, or NO to accept the
                                                                           default route name.
When a track is converted the system creates the closest route
through the recorded track, using the minimum number of               On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the
waypoints. Each waypoint created will be saved with the depth and     recorded track is displayed and the new route is added to the route
temperature data (if applicable) for that position.                   list. It can now be displayed, edited and erased etc. in the same
                                                                      way as other routes in the system.
                                                                      Building a route from a track displayed on the chart
                                                                      In the chart application:
                                                                      1. Position the cursor over the required track.
Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                         65
2. Select the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey.                             2. After adding the final waypoint in your route, press the FOLLOW
3. Select the YES softkey to name the route, or NO to accept the              (QUICK) ROUTE softkey.
   default route name.
                                                                            Note: You can stop following a route at any time by pressing
A route will be created and the current track will continue to be           the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
recorded until you select the STOP TRACK softkey.
                                                                           If you do not rename a quick route, it will be overwritten and its
                                                                           waypoints deleted when a new quick route is built.
Navigating a route
                                                                           Following a stored route
                                                                           In the chart application:
                                                                           1. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
                                                                           2. Select the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                               The Route List is displayed.
                                                                           3. Select the route you want to follow.
                                                                           4. Select the FOLLOW ROUTE softkey.

                                                                            Note: You can stop following a route at any time by selecting
                                                                            the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
                                                                D11751-1


You can follow any route stored on the display. When following             Cancelling navigation of a route
a route you visit each waypoint in order. You may also use the             From the chart navigation options:
follow route options in conjunction with a compatible autopilot to
                                                                           1. Select the STOP FOLLOW softkey.
automatically navigate along your chosen route.
There are a number of ways to select the follow route option:              Arriving at a waypoint
     · Using a temporary "Quick Route".                                    As your boat approaches a waypoint, the waypoint arrival alarm
                                                                           provides a warning.
     · From a selected waypoint or any leg within a route.
                                                                           1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.
     · Using a stored route within the route list.
                                                                           Once the alarm is acknowledged, the next waypoint is selected, and
You can also follow any route in reverse order.                            the display updates to indicate the next leg of the route.
Following a quick route
                                                                            Note: You can set the approach distance (radius) at which the
In the chart application:                                                   waypoint arrival alarm will sound using the alarm setup menu.
1. Build your route.

66                                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
Advancing to the next waypoint in a route
You can skip the current active waypoint and advance to the next
waypoint in a route at any time.
While following a route in the chart application:
1. Press the GOTO softkey, or position the cursor over the route.
2. Press the ADVANCE WAYPOINT softkey.

 Note: If the current destination is the last waypoint, the chart
 advances on to the first waypoint in the route.

Following a route in reverse order                                                                                                  D11765-1

In the chart application:                                           In the event that you steer off-track, you can go straight to your
1. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.                                   target by resetting XTE.
2. Select the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                    Resetting Cross Track Error (XTE)
    The Route List is displayed.
                                                                    While following a route in the chart application:
3. Select the route you want to follow.
                                                                    1. Press the RESTART XTE softkey.
4. Select the REVERSE AND FOLLOW softkey.
                                                                    Resetting XTE results in a new course from the current vessel
 Note: You can stop following a route at any time by selecting      position to the current target waypoint. This does not affect your
 the STOP FOLLOW softkey.                                           saved route.


Cross Track Error (XTE)                                             Erasing a route
Cross Track Error (XTE) is the amount of deviation from your        In   the chart application:
intended route or waypoint, expressed as a distance.                1.    Select the PLANNING softkey.
                                                                    2.    Select the MY ROUTES softkey.
                                                                    3.    Highlight the required route from the list.
                                                                    4.    Select the ERASE ROUTE softkey.
                                                                    5.    Select YES to confirm the action, or NO to cancel.
                                                                     Note: You can delete any route, except for the one that you are
                                                                     currently following. When you erase a route, only those waypoints
                                                                     associated with that route are deleted.

Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                        67
Review or edit a route                                                 1. Select the PLANNING softkey.
There are a variety of attributes associated with routes. These can    2. Select the MY ROUTES softkey.
be reviewed and edited.                                                3. Select the route you want to add a waypoint to.
You can:                                                               4. Select the AMEND ROUTE COURSE softkey.
· Show or hide a route on the chart screen.                            5. Select the USE WAYPOINT LIST softkey.
· Review details of the route                                          6. Highlight the right-hand column of the list.
                                                                       7. Use the trackpad to select the appropriate place for the waypoint.
· Add and remove waypoints.
                                                                       8. Press the trackpad left to highlight the left-hand column of the list.
· Move waypoints within a route.
                                                                       9. Highlight the waypoint you want to insert at the start of the route.
· Reverse a route.                                                     10. Select the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
· Change the name or color of a route.                                 11. Press the OK button.
· Erase a route.
                                                                       Adding a waypoint to a route on the chart screen
· Show or hide a route on the chart screen.                            In the chart application:
· Adjust the line thickness for routes.                                1. Move the cursor over the appropriate leg of the route.
 Note: An active route can be edited, with the exception of the            The softkeys change to provide route functions.
 target waypoint. If a waypoint being edited becomes the target,       2. Select the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey.
 then the system shall cancel the edit; the waypoint shall remain in   3. Move the cursor so that it stretches the leg of the route to the
 its original position.                                                    desired position on the chart.
                                                                       4. Select the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.
Selecting a route to review or edit
1. Do one of the following to select the required route:               Removing a waypoint from a route
                                                                       In the chart application:
     · With the chart application active, select a route on screen,
       then press the Review & Edit This Route softkey.                1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over the waypoint you want
                                                                           to remove.
     · With the chart application active, use the following softkey
       sequence; Navigation options > Planning > My Routes and         2. Press the REMOVE WAYPOINT softkey.
       select the required route from the list.                        Moving a waypoint within a route
     · From the home screen, select My routes and select the           In the chart application:
       required route from the list.
                                                                       1. Move the cursor over the waypoint you want to move.
Adding a waypoint to a stored route                                        The softkeys change to provide waypoint options.
In the chart application:                                              2. Select the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey.

68                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
3. Move the cursor so that it stretches the leg of the route to the      5.3 Tracks
   desired position on the chart.
4. Select the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey.                                    A track is an on-screen trail that shows the route you have taken.
                                                                         This trail is made up of a series of track points which are created
Reversing a route                                                        automatically. You can save the track to create a permanent record
                                                                         of where you have been
In the chart application:
1. Ensure that you are not following a route (press the STOP
    FOLLOW softkey to stop following a route).
2. Position the cursor over the appropriate route.
3. Press the REVERSE ROUTE softkey.
The waypoints in the route are renumbered, and the route name
is moved.

Showing or hiding a route
In the chart application:
1. Using the trackpad, position the cursor over the appropriate
    route.                                                               D11754-1


2. Press the HIDE ROUTE softkey.                                         With tracks you can:
Adjusting the thickness of route lines                                   · Review where you have been.
In   the chart application:                                              · Create a route from a track.
1.    Press the MENU button.
2.    Using the trackpad, select the Chart Setup option.                 Creating a track
3.    Using the trackpad, select the Route Width menu item.              In the chart application:
4.    Using the trackpad, select the appropriate route line thickness.   1. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
5.    Press the OK button.                                               2. Select the START TRACK softkey.
                                                                         As you navigate your vessel, your journey is automatically recorded
                                                                         as a track.

                                                                          Note: If the power fails whilst a track is being recorded or the
                                                                          position fix is lost, a break will occur in the track. Only the last
                                                                          segment of a track can be converted into a route.

Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                               69
 Note: If the maximum number of tracking points is reached, you           · With the chart application active, use the following softkey
 will be warned. The track will continue to be recorded with the            sequence, Navigation options > Planning > My Tracks.
 earlier tracking points being overwritten.                               · From the home screen, select My tracks.
                                                                       You can then proceed and review or edit the required track using
Erasing a track                                                        the options available.

In   the chart application:
1.    Select the PLANNING softkey.
                                                                       Track interval
                                                                       The track interval specifies the time period or distance between
2.    Select the MY TRACKS softkey.
                                                                       the points in a track.
3.    Highlight the required track from the list.                      You can adjust the interval between points which can help ensure
4.    Select the ERASE TRACK softkey.                                  best use of the available storage.
5.    Select the YES softkey to confirm the action, or NO to cancel.   The settings are available from the Chart Setup Menu:
 Note: You can also erase all tracks at once, using the DATA >         · Record Vessel Track By -- specifies the interval type (Auto /
 ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER function.                                          Time / Distance).
                                                                       · Track Interval -- specifies the interval value (for example, 15
                                                                         minutes).
Reviewing and editing a track                                          For example when creating a track for a long journey, an interval
You can review and edit aspects of the tracks stored.                  set to Auto could result in rapid use of all of the storage available
You can:                                                               for track points. In this case selecting a higher value for the Track
                                                                       Interval would provide capacity for a longer track.
· Erase a track.
                                                                       Setting the track interval
· Create a route from a track.
                                                                       In the chart application:
· Show or hide a track on the chart (only available from the chart     1. Press the MENU button.
  application).                                                        2. Select Chart Setup.
· Change the name of a track.                                          3. Select the Record Vessel Track By option and set to the
· Change the color of a track.                                             appropriate value:
                                                                          · Auto-- The track interval is automatically set.
· Erase a track.
                                                                          · Time-- The track points are placed at regular intervals of time.
Selecting a track to review or edit
                                                                          · Distance-- The track points are placed at regular intervals of
1. Do one of the following to select the required track:                    distance.
     · With the chart application active, select a track on screen.    4. Select the Track interval and set to the appropriate value:

70                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
    · Units of time from the list displayed (available if "record track   5.4 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage
      interval by" is set to time).
                                                                          capacity
    · Units of distance from the list displayed (available if "record
      track interval by" is set to distance).                             The display can store the following quantities of waypoints, routes
                                                                          and tracks
    · Greyed out; no options are available if the "record track
      interval by" is set to auto).                                        Waypoints   · 3000 Waypoints
                                                                                       · 100 waypoint groups
                                                                           Routes      · 150 routes, each consisting of up to 50 waypoints.
                                                                           Tracks      · 15 tracks, each consisting of up to 10000 track points.




Using waypoints, routes and tracks                                                                                                                 71
72   G-Series User reference
Chapter 6: Using the chart

Chapter contents
·    6.1 Chart application overview on page 74
·    6.2 Vessel position and orientation on page 76
·    6.3 Chart views on page 79
·    6.4 Chart planning options on page 83
·    6.5 Chart navigation options on page 83
·    6.6 Measuring distances and bearings on page 84
·    6.7 Chart vectors on page 85
·    6.8 Current information on page 86
·    6.9 Tide information on page 87
·    6.10 Chart object information on page 89
·    6.11 Chart layers on page 90
·    6.12 Chart presentation on page 94
·    6.13 Chart setup on page 97




Using the chart                                        73
6.1 Chart application overview
The chart application provides an electronic chart with passage
planning and navigation features. It combines 2D and 3D viewpoints
and provides a variety of cartographic information regarding your
surroundings and charted objects.
Typical uses for the chart application include :
· Monitor your vessel location and heading.
· Interpret your surroundings.
· Measure distance and bearing.
· Navigate using waypoints.
· Plan, and Navigate using routes.
                                                                         Multiple applications
· Monitor fixed and moving objects using radar overlay.
                                                                         With most applications, it is possible to run 4 instances of the same
· Monitor vessels in your vicinity using AIS data.                       application at any one time. However there are 2 exceptions to
· Keep track and record your course.                                     this, which are:

· View information for charted objects.                                  · Chart application -- maximum 2 simultaneous instances per
                                                                           multifunction display.
· Overlay NOWRad weather information.
                                                                         · Sirius satellite radio application -- maximum 1 instance per
· Overlay aerial photos and other chart enhancements                       multifunction display, at any one time.
 Note: To obtain full 3D detail, you must have chart cards               · Video application -- maximum 1 instance per multifunction
 containing 3D cartography for the appropriate geographic area.            display, at any one time.

You can also use your multifunction display to customize your chart
application to your own particular requirements and circumstances.
                                                                         Chart datum
You can:                                                                 The chart datum setting affects the accuracy of the vessel position
                                                                         information displayed in the chart application.
· Alter the way the chart is drawn in relation to your vessel and the
  direction you are travelling in (chart orientation and motion mode).   In order for your GPS receiver and multifunction display to correlate
                                                                         accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same
· Manage and edit chart data you have entered.                           datum.
· Control the level of detail displayed on-screen.

74                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
The default datum for your multifunction display is WGS1984. If          · Gold
this is not the datum used by your paper charts, you can change
the datum for your multifunction display, using the MENU > Chart         · Gold+
Setup > Datum menu item.                                                 · Platinum
When you change the datum for your multifunction display, the
                                                                         · Platinum+
chart grid will subsequently move according to the new datum, and
the latitude/longitude of the cartographic features will also change     · Fish'N Chip
accordingly. Your multifunction display will attempt to set up any
GPS receiver to the new datum, as follows:                               · Hotmaps
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using SeaTalk or                   Note: Refer to the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) for
  SeaTalkng, it will automatically correlate each time you change the     the latest list of supported chart cards.
  datum on the multifunction display.
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using NMEA0183, or a
  third-party GPS receiver, you must correlate it separately.            Chart cards overview
It may be possible to use your multifunction display to correlate an     Chart cards provide additional cartographic information.
NMEA0183 GPS receiver. Go to MENU > GPS Status. If the datum             Obtain detailed cartographic information for the area that
version is displayed, it may be possible to change it by selecting the   you navigate using Navionics® chart cards. To check the
OTHER SETUP softkey and choosing the appropriate datum. If the           current availability of Navionics chart card types, please
NMEA0183 GPS receiver does NOT state which datum it is using,            visit www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it. The amount of
you must select the NMEA0183 GPS datum using the MENU > GPS              cartographic detail shown varies for different areas and for different
Status > Other Setup > NMEA0183 GPS Datum menu item.                     scales. The chart scale in use is indicated in the status bar -- the
 Note: Raymarine recommends that you check the displayed                 number represents the distance in nautical miles horizontally across
 vessel position in the chart application against your actual            the chart.
 proximity to a known charted object. A typical GPS has an               You can remove and insert chart cards while a chart is displayed
 accuracy of between 5 and 15 m.                                         provided that you follow the correct procedure. The chart information
                                                                         is retained on-screen until the chart application redraws the screen;
                                                                         for example, when you pan outside the current area, or use the
Chart compatibility                                                      Range button to change the chart scale.
Your multifunction display is supplied with embedded Navionics
electronic charts. You can also insert Navionics chart cards to get
enhanced chart detail and additional chart features.
Your multifunction display is compatible with the following Navionics
chart cards:
· Silver
Using the chart                                                                                                                              75
     Caution: Care of chart cards                           6.2 Vessel position and orientation
     To avoid irreparable damage to and/or loss of data
     from chart cards:
                                                            Vessel position on the chart display
                                                            Your current position is represented on screen by a boat symbol.
     · Ensure that chart cards are fitted the correct way
       around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.    The boat symbol is shown below:
     · DO NOT save data (waypoints, routes, and so on)
       to a chart card, as the charts may be overwritten.        D6627-1


     · DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a            Boat symbol
       screwdriver or pliers to remove a chart card.
                                                             Note: The boat symbol can be customized, so may appear
     · Safe removal. Use the Remove Card menu option
                                                             differently on your display.
       before removing the chart card.
                                                            If neither heading nor Course Over Ground (COG) data is available,
                                                            the vessel is shown as a solid circle. If positional data has been
                                                            selected for display, your position will be displayed in the data bar
                                                            under VES POS.

                                                            Chart orientation
                                                            The orientation of a chart refers to the relationship between the
                                                            chart and the direction that you are travelling in.
                                                            It is used in conjunction with motion mode to control how your
                                                            vessel and chart relate to one another and how they are displayed
                                                            on screen.
                                                            The mode you choose applies to all chart instances, and is restored
                                                            at power up.
                                                            The following options are available:




76                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
North Up (N-up)                                                       Note: It is not possible to select Head Up when the motion mode
                                                                      is set to True.

                                                                     Course Up (C-up)




In North Up mode, the chart orientation is fixed with true north
upwards. As your heading changes the vessel symbol moves
accordingly. This is the default mode for the chart application.     In Course Up mode, the chart picture is stabilized and shown with
Head Up (H-up)                                                       your current course upwards. As your vessel's heading changes,
                                                                     the ship symbol moves accordingly. If you select a new course, the
                                                                     picture will reset to display the new course upwards. The reference
                                                                     used for Course-Up depends upon the information available at a
                                                                     given time. The system always prioritizes this information in the
                                                                     following order:
                                                                     1. Bearing from origin to destination, i.e. intended course.
                                                                     2. Locked heading from an Autopilot.
                                                                     3. Bearing to waypoint.
                                                                     4. Instantaneous heading.
Head Up mode displays the chart with your vessel's current heading
                                                                     If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode, a warning
upwards. As the heading changes the vessel symbol remains fixed
                                                                     message will be shown and the chart uses 0° heading in relative
and the chart picture rotates accordingly.
                                                                     motion.
 Note: To prevent continuous backwards and forwards rotations
                                                                     Setting the chart orientation
 as the vessel yaws from side-to-side, the chart will not update
 unless the heading changes by at least 10 degrees from the last     In the chart application:
 displayed orientation.                                              1. Press the MENU button.

Using the chart                                                                                                                       77
2. Select Chart Setup.                                                  When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your vessel
3. Use the Chart Orientation menu item to select the Head-Up,           is fixed on the screen and the chart picture moves relative to your
   North-Up, or Course-Up option, as appropriate.                       vessel. You can use the MENU > Chart Setup > Vessel Offset
                                                                        menu item to determine whether the vessel is fixed in the centre of
                                                                        the window (0 offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3. If you change the offset
Chart motion mode                                                       to 1/3 or 2/3, the view ahead of your vessel will be increased.
The motion mode controls the relationship between the chart and         In the example shown above, the motion mode has been set to
your vessel.                                                            Relative, with a vessel offset of 1/3. The vessel is fixed in the offset
                                                                        position and the chart moves accordingly:
Whilst motion mode is active, as your vessel moves, the chart is
redrawn to keep the vessel on-screen. The 3 motion modes are:           True Motion
· Relative Motion.
· True Motion.
· Autorange.

 Note: In the 3D chart view, the only available motion mode is
 Relative Motion.                                                       When the motion mode is set to True, the chart is fixed and the
                                                                        vessel moves in true perspective to fixed landmasses on the screen.
The current motion mode applies to all instances of the chart           As the vessel's position approaches the edge of the screen, the
application, including those running on networked displays.             chart picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of the
When you pan the chart or select FIND CURSOR, the motion mode           vessel.
is no longer active. This is indicated in the status bar by brackets     Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation
around the motion mode -- for example, (RM). This enables you to         is set to Head Up.
view another area of the chart whilst navigating. To reset the motion
mode and return your vessel to the screen, select FIND SHIP.
                                                                        Autorange
Manually changing the range in autorange also suspends motion
mode. The default setting is relative motion with zero offset. The
mode that you select is restored at power up.

Relative Motion with optional vessel offset



                                                                        Autorange selects and maintains the largest possible scale of chart
                                                                        that will display both the vessel and the target waypoint. Autorange
                                                                        is not available if radar-chart synchronization is on.

78                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
Setting the motion mode                                              6.3 Chart views
In   the chart application:
                                                                     The chart is viewed and manipulated in 3 dimensions. It can be
1.    Press the MENU button.                                         viewed from directly overhead (2D view) or at an angle (3D view)
2.    Select Chart Setup.
3.    Use the Motion Mode menu item to select the appropriate
      option.

Changing the vessel offset value
In   the chart application:                                                                                  85°
1.    Press the MENU button.
2.    Select Chart Setup.
3.    Use the Vessel Offset menu item to select the 0, 1/3, or 2/3            360°
      option, as appropriate.

Locating your vessel                                                                                                              D11749-1



In the chart application:                                            · 2D chart view. The chart automatically reverts to 2D mode when
1. Press the FIND softkey and select the SHIP option.                  viewed directly from above.
    Your vessel is displayed in the center of the chart.             · 3D chart view. The chart operates in 3D mode whenever it is
2. To mark this position, press the WPTS MOB button twice, then        not viewed directly from above.
    press the OK button.




Using the chart                                                                                                                         79
2D chart view                                                                   Item   Description
The 2D chart view displays a range of information to help you                   5      Motion mode -- states the current motion mode (Relative,
navigate.                                                                              True, or Autorange).
     1       2        3        4                    5       6    7    8     9   6      Cartographic objects -- use the Cartography Setup menu
                                                                                       to choose which objects to display.
                                                                                7      AIS target -- a vessel broadcasting AIS information.
                                                                                8      Chart type -- indicates the type of chart in use -- Fish or
                                                                                       Navigation.
                                                                                9      Status bar -- displays the status of externally connected
                                                                                       equipment.




 Item            Description
 1               Range -- horizontal distance across screen (halfway up the
                 window or at center-of-view). Shown in selected system
                 units.
 2               Waypoint -- with arrival circle.
 3               Orientation -- states the orientation mode that the chart is
                 using (North-up, Head-up, or Course-up).
 4               Vessel symbol-- shows your current position.



80                                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
3D chart view                                                                      Item               Description
The 3D chart view includes a number of functions to help you                       6                  Center-of-view -- the white cross indicates the center
navigate your vessel.                                                                                 of chart view at the water level.
     1   2        3    4       5      6        7                         8   9     7                  Cartographic objects -- use the Cartography Setup
                                                                                                      menu to choose which objects to display.
                                                                                   8                  Rotation -- shows in degrees true, how far the
                                                                                                      on-screen view has been rotated from your vessel's
                                                                                                      heading.
                                                                                   9                  North arrow ­ 3D indication of True North in relation
                                                                                                      to the chart view. The north arrow also tilts to indicate
                                                                                                      pitch angle.


                                                                                  Manipulating the chart view
                                                                                  Use a combination of the rotary control, trackpad, and range keys to
                                                                                  manipulate the chart view.
                                                                                                    Rotary control -- is used for pitch and rotate.




 Item                 Description
                                                                                                    Trackpad -- is used for panning.
 1                    Range -- horizontal distance across screen (halfway
                      up the window or at center of view). Shown in selected
                      system units.
 2                    Vessel symbol -- your vessel's current position.
 3                    Depth Scale -- approximate depth beneath your vessel.                         Range key -- is used to zoom in and out.
                                                                                       OUT
 4                    Waypoint -- with arrival circle.                                 RANGE

 5                    Orientation -- states the orientation mode that the chart           IN
                      is using.

Using the chart                                                                                                                                                   81
1. Chart pitch.                                                            4. Pan-- Use the trackpad to pan the chart.
   i. If the chart is in 3D mode, select the Pitch option from the
       softkey toolbar                                                     Switching between 2D/3D chart view
   ii. Use the rotary control to change the pitch angle of the chart
       display.                                                            You can quickly toggle between 2D and 3D views.
                                                                D11755-1   In the chart application:
                                                                           1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                           2. Select the 2D or 3D option, using the VIEW softkey.




2. Rotate (only available when the chart is in 3D mode)
   i. Select the Rotate option from the softkey toolbar
   ii. Use the rotary dial to rotate the chart display.
D11756-1




3. Zoom-- Use the range key to zoom in or out of the chart.

82                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
6.4 Chart planning options                                             6.5 Chart navigation options
The chart provides features to help plan your navigation to a chosen   The chart provides features to help navigate to a chosen location.
location.                                                              The Navigation Options are found on the chart toolbar softkeys --
The options are found on the chart softkeys -- Navigation options      Navigation options>Navigation
> Planning.
                                                                       · Ruler -- Provides options to measure distance
· Build new route -- Allows you to build a route using a series
  of waypoints.                                                        · Goto Cursor -- Will set the cursor position as the active
                                                                         destination.
· My Routes -- View and edit routes stored on the system.
                                                                       · Follow Route Options... -- Provides options to navigate to a
· My Tracks -- View and edit tracks stored on the system. Start          route stored on the system
  or stop a track.
                                                                       · Goto Waypoint options -- Provides options to navigate to a
· My Waypoints -- View and edit waypoints stored on the system.          waypoint stored on the system
                                                                       · Start Track -- Will initiate a track on screen to retrospectively plot
                                                                         your course as you progress.




Using the chart                                                                                                                             83
6.6 Measuring distances and bearings                               Clearing the chart ruler
                                                                   In   the chart application:
You can use the databar information and the ruler to measure
distances in the chart application.                                1.    Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
You can determine the distance and bearing:                        2.    Select the RULER softkey.
                                                                   3.    Select the CLEAR RULER softkey.
· from your boat to the position of the cursor;
· between two points on the chart.

 Note: You must have Cursor Position data displayed in the
 databar when making measurements. Go to MENU > Databar
 Setup > Configure to customize the databar.


Positioning the chart ruler
In the chart application:
1. Position the cursor at the start point of your measurement or
    bearing.
2. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
3. Select the RULER softkey.
4. Position the cursor at the end point of your measurement or
    bearing. The range and bearing is displayed.
5. Press the OK button to fix the new ruler position.

Repositioning the chart ruler
In the chart application, with the ruler displayed:
1. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
2. Select the RULER softkey.
3. Use the ADJUST A or ADJUST B softkey to select the start
    or end point, as appropriate.
4. Move the cursor to the new ruler position.
5. Press the OK button to fix the new ruler position.

84                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
6.7 Chart vectors                                                                         Note: If neither Speed Over Ground (SOG) or heading data is
                                                                                          available, vectors cannot be displayed.
Chart vectors display indicators for heading and COG, and wind
and tide direction.
                                                                                         Vector length
A range of vector graphics can be superimposed on to the chart
display. The following vectors can be independently enabled or                           The length of the HDG and COG vector lines is determined by the
disabled in the 2D set up menu, accessible from the Chart Setup                          distance your vessel will travel in the time you have specified (3
Menu:                                                                                    mins, 6 mins or Infinite) in the Chart Setup Menu at the current
                                                                                         speed. Any times that you specify will apply to all chart views, and if
                                                                                         the Infinite option is selected, the vector will extend to the edge of
                                                                                         the chart window.

                                                                                         Enabling and disabling chart vectors
                                                                                         In   the 2D chart view:
                                                                                         1.    Press the MENU button.
                                                                                         2.    Select Chart Setup.
                                                                                         3.    Select 2D set up.
                                                                                         4.    Select the ON or OFF option for the Heading Vector, COG
                                                                              D11746-1
                                                                                               Vector, Tide Arrow, or Wind Arrow menu items, as appropriate.

 Vector descriptions
 HDG (heading) vector -- a red line shows the vessel's heading. An arrow head
 is used if the vector length is set to a value other than infinite.
 COG (Course Over Ground) vector -- a green line indicates the vessel's
 actual course. A double arrow head is used if the vector length is set to a value
 other than infinite.
 Tide arrow -- tide is displayed as a blue line with solid arrow head pointing
 away from your vessel, in the direction of the tidal set. The width of the arrow
 indicates the tide strength.
 Wind arrow -- wind direction is displayed as a yellow line with solid arrow
 heads pointing towards your vessel, indicating the wind direction. The width of
 the arrow indicates the wind strength.

Using the chart                                                                                                                                               85
6.8 Current information                                                               · The color of the arrow indicates the flow speed:
                                                                                        ­ Red: increasing current flow speed.
Animated current information
                                                                                        ­ Blue: decreasing current flow speed.
The electronic charts may allow animation of the current information
current stations.                                                                     The animation can be viewed continuously or incrementally for
                                                                                      a time period that you specify. You can also set the date for the
                                                                                      animation, and start or restart the animation at any point within a
                                                                                      24-hour period. If the system does not have a valid date and time
                                                                                      the date used will be midday for the system default date.

                                                                                       Note: Not all electronic charts support the animated currents
                                                                                       feature.

                                                                                      Viewing animated current information
                                                                                      In the chart application:
                                                                                      1. Position the cursor over a diamond-shaped current icon.
                                                                           D11748-2   2. Press the OK button to display the Object Info dialog box.
                                                                                          The softkeys change to provide current-related options.
Animated current information is available in the chart application
wherever a diamond-shaped symbol with a "C" is displayed:                             3. Select the Animate softkey.
        This symbol indicates the availability of animated current information            The softkeys change to provide animation options.
        for the location.
                                                                                      Controlling animations
When you position the cursor over a current symbol the softkeys                       In the chart application, with an animation displayed:
change to provide the animation options.                                              1. To start or stop the animation, select the ANIMATION PLAY
When you select the ANIMATE softkey the diamond-shaped current                            / PAUSE softkey.
symbols are replaced with dynamic current arrows which indicate                       2. To view the animation in steps, select the STEP BACK or STEP
the direction and strength of the currents:                                               FWD softkeys.
              Current animation.                                                      3. To set the animation step interval, pause any playing animations,
                                                                                          and then select the SET TIME INTERVAL softkey.
                                                                                      4. To set the animation date, select the SET DATE softkey. The
                                                                                          Edit Date screen shows the following options:
· Arrows indicate the direction of current flows.
· The length of the arrow indicates the flow rate.

86                                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
 TODAY'S          Set the animation date to the current date.        6.9 Tide information
 DATE
 PREV DATE        Set the animation date to 24-hours previous to     Animated tide information
                  current date.                                      The electronic charts may allow animation of the tide information
 NEXT DATE        Set the animation date to 24-hours ahead of        tide stations.
                  current date.                                      Animated current information is available in the chart application
                                                                     wherever a diamond-shaped symbol with a "T" is displayed:
 EDIT DATE        Opens the Edit Date pop-up screen: use the
                  trackpad or rotary control to enter the date for           This symbol indicates the availability of animated tide information for
                  which you want to see an animation.                        the location.

5. Press OK to save the new date and return to the animation, or     When you position the cursor over a tide symbol the softkeys
   CANCEL to ignore the date change and return to the animation,     change to provide the animation options.
   leaving the date setting unchanged.
                                                                     When you select the ANIMATE softkey the diamond-shaped tide
                                                                     symbols are replaced with the dynamic tide bar which indicates the
Displaying details of currents                                       predicted tide height for the actual time and date:
In the chart application:                                                    Tide animation.
1. Position the cursor over the diamond-shaped current symbol.
    The softkeys change to provide current-related options.          · Tide height is indicated by a gauge. The gauge is comprised
2. Press the OK button to display information for that current.        of 8 levels, which are set according to the absolute minimum /
3. Select the VIEW CURRENT STATION softkey.                            maximum values of that particular day.
4. To move the time selector, use the trackpad.                      · The color of the arrow on the tide gauges indicates changes in
5. To change the displayed date, use the appropriate softkeys.         the tide height:
                                                                       ­ Red: increasing tide height.
                                                                       ­ Blue: decreasing tide height.
                                                                     The animation can be viewed continuously or incrementally for
                                                                     a time period that you specify. You can also set the date for the
                                                                     animation, and start or restart the animation at any point within a
                                                                     24-hour period. If the system does not have a valid date and time
                                                                     the date used will be midday for the system default date.

                                                                      Note: Not all electronic charts support the animated tides feature.

Using the chart                                                                                                                                        87
Viewing animated tide information                                      Displaying details of tides
In the chart application:                                              In the chart application:
1. Position the cursor over a diamond-shaped tide icon.                1. Position the cursor over the diamond-shaped tide symbol.
2. Press the OK button to display the Object Info dialog box.          2. Press the OK button to display information for that tide.
    The softkeys change to provide tide-related options.                   The softkeys change to provide tide-related options.
3. Select the Animate softkey.                                         3. Select the VIEW TIDE STATION softkey.
    The softkeys change to provide animation options.                  4. To move the time selector, use the trackpad or rotary control.
Controlling animations                                                 5. To change the displayed date, use the appropriate softkeys.

In the chart application, with an animation displayed:
1. To start or stop the animation, select the ANIMATION PLAY
    / PAUSE softkey.
2. To view the animation in steps, select the STEP BACK or STEP
    FWD softkeys.
3. To set the animation step interval, pause any playing animations,
    and then select the SET TIME INTERVAL softkey.
4. To set the animation date, select the SET DATE softkey. The
    Edit Date screen shows the following options:

 TODAY'S          Set the animation date to the current date.
 DATE
 PREV DATE        Set the animation date to 24-hours previous to
                  current date.
 NEXT DATE        Set the animation date to 24-hours ahead of
                  current date.
 EDIT DATE        Opens the Edit Date pop-up screen: use the
                  trackpad or rotary control to enter the date for
                  which you want to see an animation.
5. Press OK to save the new date and return to the animation, or
   CANCEL to ignore the date change and return to the animation,
   leaving the date setting unchanged.

88                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
6.10 Chart object information                                          1. Position the cursor over the object.
                                                                          A pop-up is displayed, showing the basic object information.
You can display additional information on the chart for cartographic
objects, ports, and marinas.                                           2. Press the OK button.
You can also search for the nearest instance of a particular chart        Detailed information for that object is displayed, and the softkeys
object and search for ports by name.                                      change to provide the FIND NEAREST and SEARCH BY NAME
                                                                          options.
Depending on the chart card you are using, you can view some or
                                                                       3. If the object information includes more than one subject area, use
all of the following additional information:
                                                                          the rotary control to highlight and select the required information.
· Details of each cartographic object that is marked on the chart,
  including source data for structures, lines, open sea areas, and
  so on.
                                                                       Searching for the nearest chart object by type
· Details of ports, port features, and business services.              In the chart application:
                                                                       1. Press the OK button.
· Pilot book information (similar to what you would see in a marine
  almanac). Pilot book information is available at certain ports.          The softkeys change to provide the object search options.
                                                                       2. Select the FIND NEAREST softkey.
· Panoramic photos of ports and marinas. The availability of photos
  is indicated by a camera symbol on the chart display.                    A list of chart object types is displayed.
                                                                       3. Highlight the chart object in the list.
There are 2 main ways of accessing object information:
                                                                       4. Press the OK button.
· At any time -- by pressing the OK button. This provides a list of
                                                                           A list is displayed of the available instances of that particular
  chart objects, and access to the FIND NEAREST and SEARCH
                                                                           chart object.
  BY NAME softkeys.
                                                                       5. Highlight the chart object instance that you want to find.
· Using an object on the screen -- placing the cursor over the
                                                                       6. Select the SHOW ON CHART softkey.
  object and pressing OK provides information specific to that
  object, and access to the FIND NEAREST and SEARCH BY
  NAME options.                                                        Searching for a port by name
 Note: The amount of object information available depends upon         In the chart application:
 the electronic charts that you are using for your system. For full    1. Press the OK button.
 details of the features available for your chart cards contact your       The softkeys change to provide the search object options.
 chart card supplier.
                                                                       2. Select the SEARCH BY NAME softkey.
                                                                       3. Select the EDIT NAME softkey.
Displaying chart object information                                        The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
In the chart application:                                              4. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the desired port name.
Using the chart                                                                                                                                89
5. Select the SEARCH softkey.                                  6.11 Chart layers
   The search results are displayed.
                                                               The chart has a number of content layers and display modes
6. Select an entry in the list to display more information.
                                                               providing different kinds of display and information.
                                                               You can overlay data onto a chart window to give greater depth of
Displaying pilot book information                              information. The overlays available are:
In the chart application, when a port symbol is displayed:     · Aerial overlay. Provides an aerial / satellite photography overlay.
1. Position the cursor over the port symbol.
                                                               · NowRad weather (2D view only) -- Provides the NowRad weather
2. Press the OK button.                                          radar overlay, without the need to open a separate weather
    The Object Info dialog is displayed.                         application window.
3. Select the Pilot Book menu item.                            · Weather reports (2D view only) -- Provides weather reports,
4. Highlight the relevant book or chapter.                       without the need to open a separate weather application window.
5. Select the VIEW PILOT BOOK softkey.                         · Radar overlay (2D view only) -- Overlay radar onto the chart.
                                                               · AIS Targets (2D view only) -- View and track AIS targets.
Displaying panoramic photos
                                                               · Adjust Exaggeration (3D view only) -- Adjust the 3D relief.
In the chart application, when a camera symbol is displayed,
indicating the availability of a photo:                        · Waypoint names (3D view only) -- View waypoint names on
1. Position the cursor over the camera symbol.                   the chart.
2. Press the OK button.                                         Note: The layers require electronic charts with the appropriate
3. Select the VIEW PHOTO softkey.                               feature support and may also require additional hardware and
                                                                service subscriptions.




90                                                                                                               G-Series User reference
Aerial photo overlay                                                Specifying aerial overlay opacity
Your electronic charts may include aerial photography.              In the 2D chart view:
                                                                    1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS softkey.
                                                                    2. Use the AERIAL OVERLAY softkey to select the ON option.
                                                                        The opacity bar is displayed above the softkey.
                                                                    3. Use the rotary control to adjust the opacity, between 1 and 100%.

                                                                    Specifying the aerial overlay area
                                                                    In the chart application, with aerial photo overlay enabled:
                                                                    1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                    2. Select the Cartography Setup menu item.
                                                                    3. Select the Aerial Photo Overlay menu item.
                                                                    4. Select the On Land or On Land and Sea option, as appropriate.
                                                                    5. Press the OK button.

                                                                    3D chart detail exaggeration
                                                                    You can exaggerate the vertical size of objects on the 3D chart to
                                                                    make it easier to interpret what you are seeing.
                                                                    Sometimes it is easier to see certain topographical features if they
                                                                    are exaggerated. Adjusting the exaggeration has the effect of
                                                                    vertically stretching objects on the chart, making it easier to see
                                                                    their shape and position. This could be particularly helpful if you
                                                                    are fishing, for example.
Aerial photos cover the navigable waters up to 3 miles inside the
coastline. The resolution is dependent on the region covered by     Adjusting the 3D chart exaggeration
the chart card.
                                                                    In   the 3D chart view:
Enabling aerial photo overlay                                       1.    Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
In the chart view:                                                  2.    Select the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey.
1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS or 3D CHART LAYERS softkey            3.    Select the ADJUST EXAGGERATION softkey.
    as appropriate.                                                 4.    Using the trackpad, select the required amount of exaggeration.
2. Use the AERIAL OVERLAY softkey to select the ON option.
Using the chart                                                                                                                          91
Radar overlay                                                            Chart scale and radar range synchronization
You can combine the chart with the radar and MARPA functions             You can synchronize the radar range in all radar windows with the
to provide target tracking or to help you distinguish between fixed      chart scale.
objects and other marine traffic.                                        When synchronization is switched on:
You can enhance the use of your chart by combining it with the
following radar features:                                                · The radar range in all radar windows changes to match the chart
                                                                           scale.
· MARPA.
                                                                         · `Sync' is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the chart window.
· Radar overlay (for distinguishing between fixed and moving
  objects).                                                              · If you change the radar range, in any radar window, all
                                                                           synchronized chart views change scale to match.
Using the radar to view MARPA targets on the chart
                                                                         · If you change the scale of a synchronized chart window, all radar
The Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) function is used for         windows change range to match.
target tracking and risk analysis. When the radar overlay is on, all
MARPA targets are displayed in the chart window and associated           Synchronizing the chart and radar range
MARPA functions can be accessed via the chart.
                                                                         In   the 2D chart view:
Using radar overlay to distinguish between fixed and moving              1.    Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
objects
                                                                         2.    Use the SYNC softkey to select the RDR option.
You can overlay radar image data over your chart image allowing
                                                                         3.    Use the RANGE IN or OUT control to change the chart and
better distinction between fixed objects and other marine traffic. For
                                                                               radar range.
best results, switch on Radar-Chart synchronization to ensure radar
range and chart scale are synchronized.                                   Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the
Enabling radar overlay                                                    chart motion mode is set to AUTORANGE.
In the 2D chart view:
1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS softkey.
2. Use the RADAR OVERLAY softkey to select the ON option.
Accessing MARPA controls on the chart
In the chart application:
1. Select the target using the cursor.
    The MARPA-related softkeys are displayed.
2. Alternatively, with Radar Overlay switched on, press the
    TARGET TRACKING softkey.

92                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
Range rings                                                            NOWRad weather overlay
                                                                       With a suitable weather receiver connected to your multifunction
                                                                 3nm   display, you can overlay NOWRad weather information on the chart
                                                                       display.
                                                        2nm
                                                                       The NOWRad weather overlay provides NOWRad weather
                                              1nm                      information and reports in the chart application. You can adjust the
                                                                       intensity of the overlay to achieve optimal visibility of both chart
                                                                       and weather information.
D11766-1




Range rings give you an incremental representation of distance
from your vessel to help you judge distances at a glance. The rings
are always centred on your vessel, and the scale varies to suit your
current zoom setting. Each ring is labelled with the distance from
your vessel.

Enabling range rings
In         the 2D chart view:
1.          Press the MENU button.                                      Note: The NOWRad weather overlay can only be used in North
                                                                        America and its coastal waters.
2.          Select Chart Setup .
3.          Select 2D Set Up.
                                                                       Enabling NOWRad weather overlay on the chart
4.          Select the ON option for the 2D Range Rings menu item.
                                                                       In the 2D chart view:
                                                                       1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS softkey.
                                                                       2. Select the ON option using the NOWRAD OVERLAY softkey.
                                                                       Choosing weather reports for display on the chart
                                                                       In the 2D chart view:
                                                                       1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS softkey.
                                                                       2. Select the WEATHER REPORTS softkey.
Using the chart                                                                                                                          93
3. Use the TROPICAL STATEMENTS, MARINE WARNINGS,      6.12 Chart presentation
   MARINE ZONE FORECASTS, or WATCHBOX WARNINGS
   softkeys to select the required weather reports.   The chart has a number of presentation options which affect the
                                                      level of detail, types of objects and aspects of its operation.
                                                      The presentation options available are:
                                                      · Sync -- Synchronize the radar and chart scales.
                                                      · Chart detail -- Set the level of object detail shown on the chart.
                                                      · Chart type -- Select fishing charts (if supported by your chosen
                                                        chart supplier).
                                                      · View -- Toggle 2D and 3D perspective view.

                                                      Accessing chart presentation options
                                                      In the chart application:
                                                      1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                      2. Use the softkey toolbar to set the required options.

                                                      Multiple chart synchronization
                                                      You can synchronize the heading, range, and position information
                                                      across multiple chart views and networked displays (SeaTalk hs).
                                                      When chart synchronization is enabled:
                                                      · It is indicated by "Chart Sync" in the chart application status bar.
                                                      · Some softkey functions are not available with this feature, and
                                                        are "grayed-out".
                                                      · Any changes made to the heading, range or position in any chart
                                                        instance will be reflected in all other chart instances.
                                                       Note: When the 2D and 3D chart views are synchronized, the
                                                       Motion Mode is always Relative Motion.

                                                      Synchronizing multiple chart instances
                                                      In the chart application:
                                                      1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.

94                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
2. Use the SYNC softkey to select the CHRT option.                        Chart Detail
3. If you have networked displays, repeat Step 2 in the chart
   application on each display that you want to synchronize.                                  5
Fish mode                                                                            5
Fish mode provides bathymetric contour data on the chart for use                                  9
during fishing.
                                                                                                       14
Before you can display bathymetric data in the chart application you                 9
must have chart cards with the relevant level of detail.
When you change the CHART TYPE to the FISH option, bathymetric




                                                                          D11757-1
data is shown on the chart (providing that the chart card contains                       14
bathymetric data for that particular location). Certain chart detail is
also removed to ensure the bathymetric data can be seen clearly           The chart detail setting determines the amount of cartographic detail
on the chart display.                                                     shown in the chart application.
If the chart card does NOT contain bathymetric data the chart             Selecting the LOW option for the CHART DETAIL softkey hides the
reverts to the default NAV (navigation) data.                             following cartographic objects:
Enabling Fish mode                                                        · Text.
In   the chart application:                                               · Chart boundaries.
1.    Select the PRESENTATION softkey.                                    · Spot soundings.
2.    Select the CHART TYPE softkey .
                                                                          · Depth contours.
3.    Use the CHART USE softkey to select the FISH option.
                                                                          · Light sectors.
 Note: The CHART USE softkey is disabled if your cartography
                                                                          · Caution and routing Data.
 does NOT support the feature.
                                                                          · Land and marine features.
                                                                          · Business services (if available for your chart card).
                                                                          Selecting the HIGH option shows these objects.

                                                                          Changing the level of chart detail
                                                                          In the chart application:
                                                                          1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
Using the chart                                                                                                                              95
2. Use the CHART DETAIL softkey to select the HIGH or LOW
   option, as appropriate.




96                                                          G-Series User reference
6.13 Chart setup
The set up for your chart and its cartography can be changed from the standard configuration to suit your particular needs.
Although you will probably only do this when you first use the chart,
you may decide to make subsequent adjustments once you become
more familiar with the system. Any settings that you change are
retained even when you power off.

Selecting the chart setup menu
In the chart application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the Chart Setup menu item.
    The Chart Setup Menu is displayed.




Using the chart                                                                                                               97
Chart setup menu options
The following table describes the various options in the Chart Setup Menu for your multifunction display.
 Menu item                            Description                                                                 Options
 Chart Orientation                    Chart orientation is the relationship between the chart and the direction   · Head-Up
                                      that you are travelling in. This menu option enables you to choose
                                      the orientation.                                                            · North-Up (default)
                                                                                                                  · Course-Up
 2D Motion Mode                       The motion mode controls the relationship between the chart and             · Relative Motion (default)
                                      your vessel. This setting only applies to the 2D chart view. The 3D
                                      chart view is always set to Relative Motion, regardless of the setting      · True Motion
                                      you specify here.                                                           · Autorange
 Vessel Offset                        Determines whether the vessel is fixed in the center of the window (0       · 0 (default)
                                      offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3. The 1/3 or 2/3 options provide a better
                                      view ahead of your vessel.                                                  · 1/3
                                                                                                                  · 2/3
 Vessel Icon Type                     Determines the type of vessel icon displayed in the chart application.      · Sail (default)
                                                                                                                  · Power
 Vessel Icon Size                     Determines the size of vessel icon displayed in the chart application.      · Small (default)
                                                                                                                  · Large




98                                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
 Menu item        Description                                                                 Options
 3D set up        Settings specific to the 3D chart view:                                     · Center-of-view indicator:
                  · Center-of-view indicator -- determines whether a white cross is             ­ ON
                    displayed, indicating the centre of view.
                                                                                                ­ OFF (default)
                  · Trans Cone -- displays a transducer cone below the vessel icon,
                    indicating the approximate scope of the fishfinder coverage.              · Trans Cone:

                  · Depth Scale -- displays a scale below the vessel icon, indicating           ­ ON
                    the approximate depth of the water underneath your vessel.                  ­ OFF (default)
                                                                                              · Depth Scale:
                                                                                                ­ ON
                                                                                                ­ OFF (default)
 2D set up        Settings specific to the 2D chart view:                                     · Heading Vector:
                  · Heading Vector -- displays a red vector line from your vessel icon,         ­ ON
                    indicating your current heading. The length of the line depends on
                    the value you specify for the Vector Length setting.                        ­ OFF (default)

                  · COG Vector -- displays a green vector line from your vessel icon,         · COG Vector:
                    indicating your current Course Over Ground (COG) bearing. The               ­ ON
                    length of the line depends on the value you specify for the Vector
                    Length setting.                                                             ­ OFF (default)
                  · Tide Arrow -- displays a blue animated arrow indicating the               · Tide Arrow:
                    direction of tides. The width of the arrow indicates the tide strength.
                                                                                                ­ ON
                  · Wind Arrow -- displays a yellow animated arrow indicating the
                    wind direction. The width of the arrow indicates the wind strength.         ­ OFF (default)

                  · Vector Length -- the distance your vessel travels in the time period      · Wind Arrow:
                    specified for this option, determines the length of the vector lines        ­ ON
                    drawn on the chart display. This affects COG and HDG (heading)
                    vectors. If the Infinite option is selected, the vector will extend to      ­ OFF (default)
                    the edge of the chart window.
                                                                                              · Vector Length:

Using the chart                                                                                                             99
 Menu item            Description                                                             Options

                      · Vector Width -- sets the width of the COG and HDG (heading)             ­ 3 Mins
                        chart vector lines.
                                                                                                ­ 6 Mins
                      · Route Width -- sets the width of route lines.
                                                                                                ­ Infinite (default)
                      · Range Rings -- displays radar range rings on the chart display.
                                                                                              · Vector Width:
                                                                                                ­ Thin
                                                                                                ­ Normal (default)
                                                                                                ­ Wide
                                                                                              · Route Width:
                                                                                                ­ Thin
                                                                                                ­ Normal (default)
                                                                                                ­ Wide
                                                                                              · Range Rings:
                                                                                                ­ ON
                                                                                                ­ OFF (default)

 Object Information   Determines how further information is accessed for cartographic areas   · OFF
                      and objects:
                                                                                              · Points ON
                      · OFF -- information is displayed for a cartographic object when you
                                                                                              · All ON (default)
                        move the cursor over the object and press the OK button.
                      · ALL ON -- information is displayed for cartographic objects and
                        areas when you move the cursor over an object or area.
                      · Points ON -- information is displayed for a cartographic object
                        when you move the cursor over the object.



100                                                                                                                    G-Series User reference
 Menu item                Description                                                                Options
 Record Vessel Track By   Determines how track points are recorded on the chart:                     · Auto (default)
                          · Auto -- track points are automatically created.                          · Time
                          · Time -- track points are created based on time.                          · Distance
                          · Distance -- track points are created based on distance.
 Track Interval           Determines the interval that will be used for track point creation. The    If TIME is selected for the Record Vessel Track
                          options available depend on the option selected for the Record Vessel      By menu item:
                          Track By menu item, as follows:
                                                                                                     · 2 secs
                          · Auto -- if the Auto option is selected for the Record Vessel Track
                            By menu item, no options are available for the Track Interval menu       · 5 secs
                            item.                                                                    · 10 secs
                          · Time -- if the Time option is selected for the Record Vessel Track       · 30 secs
                            By menu item, you can use the Track Interval menu item to specify
                            the time interval.                                                       · 1 min
                          · Distance -- if the Distance option is selected for the Record            · 3 min
                            Vessel Track By menu item, you can use the Track Interval menu           · 5 min
                            item to specify the distance interval. The units used for this setting
                            depend on the setting made for Distance Units in the MENU >              · 10 min
                            System Setup > Units Setup menu.
                                                                                                     · 30 min
                                                                                                     If DISTANCE is selected for the Record Vessel
                                                                                                     Track By menu item:
                                                                                                     · 0.02 nm / sm / km
                                                                                                     · 0.05 nm / sm / km
                                                                                                     · 0.1 nm / sm / km
                                                                                                     · 0.2 nm / sm / km
                                                                                                     · 0.5 nm / sm / km



Using the chart                                                                                                                                  101
 Menu item                        Description                                                                Options

                                                                                                             · 1.0 nm / sm / km
 System Datum                     In order for your GPS and chart to correlate accurately with your paper    · WGS1984 (default)
                                  charts, they must be using the same datum. The default datum for your
                                  display is WGS1984. If this is not suitable, you can change the setting.   · List of available datum
                                  When you change the datum setting, the chart grid will subsequently
                                  move according to the new datum, and the latitude/longitude of
                                  the cartographic features will also change accordingly. The system
                                  attempts to set up any GPS to the new mode, and indicates whether
                                  this was successful or not.

                                   Note: Raymarine recommends that you check the displayed
                                   vessel position in the chart application against your actual proximity
                                   to a known charted object. A typical GPS has an accuracy of
                                   between 5 and 15 m.


Selecting the cartography setup menu
In the chart application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the Cartography Setup menu item.




102                                                                                                                                  G-Series User reference
Cartography setup menu options
The following table describes the various options in the Cartography Setup Menu for your multifunction display.
 Menu item                            Description                                                             Options
 Chart Display                        Determines the level of detail shown on the chart.                      · Simple
                                                                                                              · Detailed (default)
                                                                                                              · Extra Detailed
 Chart Grid                           Determines whether grid lines representing longitude and latitude are   · OFF
                                      displayed on the chart:
                                                                                                              · ON (default)
                                      · OFF -- grid lines are NOT displayed.
                                      · ON -- grid lines are displayed.
 Chart Text                           Determines whether chart text is displayed (place names and so on).     · OFF
                                      · OFF -- chart text is NOT displayed.                                   · ON (default)
                                      · ON -- chart text is displayed.
 Chart Boundaries                     Determines whether a line indicating the chart boundary is displayed.   · OFF
                                      · OFF -- chart boundary is NOT displayed.                               · ON (default)
                                      · ON -- chart boundary is displayed.
 Spot Soundings                       Determines whether a number indicating depth is displayed.              · OFF
                                      · OFF -- depth is NOT displayed.                                        · ON (default)
                                      · ON -- depth is displayed.




Using the chart                                                                                                                      103
 Menu item            Description                                                              Options
 Safety Contour       The chart will use this depth as the deep water boundary. Water          · OFF
                      areas of depth greater than this will be colored using the appropriate
                      Deep Water Color.                                                        · 7 ft
                                                                                               · 10 ft
                                                                                               · 16 ft
                                                                                               · 20 ft
                                                                                               · 33 ft
                                                                                               · 66 ft (default)
 Depth Contour        The depth contour is shown on the chart display as a line indicating     · OFF
                      the depth at a particular position.
                                                                                               · 16 ft
                                                                                               · 20 ft
                                                                                               · 33 ft
                                                                                               · 66 ft
                                                                                               · ALL (default)
 Nav. Marks           Determines whether navigation marks are displayed on the chart:          · OFF
                      · OFF -- navigation marks are NOT displayed.                             · ON (default)
                      · ON -- navigation marks are displayed.
 Nav. Marks Symbols   Determines which set of navigation mark symbols is used --               · International (default)
                      International, or US. These symbols correspond to paper charts.
                                                                                               · US
 Light Sectors        Determines whether the sector of light cast by a fixed beacon is         · OFF
                      displayed or not.
                                                                                               · ON (default)
                      · OFF -- sector of light is NOT displayed.
                      · ON -- sector of light is displayed.


104                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
 Menu item                Description                                                            Options
 Caution & Routing Data   Determines whether caution and routing data is displayed or not.       · OFF
                          · OFF -- caution and routing data is NOT displayed.                    · ON (default)
                          · ON -- caution and routing data is displayed.
 Marine Features          When this menu item is set to ON, the following water-based            · OFF
                          cartographic features are displayed:
                                                                                                 · ON (default)
                          · Cables.
                          · Nature of seabed points.
                          · Tide stations.
                          · Current stations.
                          · Port information.
 Land Features            When this menu item is set to ON, land-based cartographic features     · OFF
                          are displayed.
                                                                                                 · ON (default)
 Deep Water Color         Determines the color used to shade areas of deep water. (The depth     · White (default)
                          used to determine areas of deep water is specified by the Safety
                          Contour setting)                                                       · Blue

 Business Services        When this menu item is set to ON, symbols indicating the location of   · OFF
                          a business will be shown.
                                                                                                 · ON (default)
 Panoramic Photos         Determines whether panoramic photos are available for landmarks        · OFF (default)
                          such as ports and marinas.
                                                                                                 · ON
 Roads                    Determines whether major coastal roads are displayed on the chart:     · OFF
                          · OFF -- coastal roads are NOT displayed.                              · ON (default)
                          · ON -- coastal roads are displayed.



Using the chart                                                                                                      105
 Menu item              Description                                                               Options
 Additional Wrecks      Determines whether extended information for new wrecks is displayed.      · OFF
                                                                                                  · ON (default)
 Aerial Photo Overlay   Determines the areas of the chart covered by the aerial photo overlay     · On Land (default)
                        feature.
                                                                                                  · On Land and Sea
                                                                                                  · On Land and Shallow
 Colored Seabed Areas   Provides greater definition of the seabed. This applies only to limited   · OFF (default)
                        areas where the extra detail is available.
                                                                                                  · ON




106                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
Chapter 7: Using autopilot control

Chapter contents
·    7.1 Enabling the autopilot control function on page 108
·    7.2 Disengaging the autopilot in an emergency on page 108
·    7.3 G-Series keyboard autopilot controls on page 109
·    7.4 Autopilot dialog box on page 110
·    7.5 Autopilot control options on page 110
·    7.6 Dodge control on page 111
·    7.7 Autopilot status symbols on page 114
·    7.8 Autopilot alarms on page 115




Using autopilot control                                          107
7.1 Enabling the autopilot control                                7.2 Disengaging the autopilot in an
function                                                          emergency
1.    Press the MENU button.                                      While following a route using the autopilot:
2.    Select System Setup.                                        1. Press and release the POWER button.
3.    Select System Integration.                                  2. Press the PILOT STANDBY softkey.
4.    Use the Autopilot Control menu item to select the Enabled   The autopilot is disengaged, and put into standby mode.
      option.




108                                                                                                              G-Series User reference
7.3 G-Series keyboard autopilot controls                                   · When you press the GOTO or FOLLOW ROUTE softkey in the
                                                                             chart application.
You can use the G-Series Command Center keyboard to control
your autopilot.                                                            · When you are following a route or going to a waypoint or cursor
                                                                             position, and place the cursor over an active route or waypoint
 Note: For information on connecting an autopilot to your system,            on the chart, and press the STOP GOTO, STOP FOLLOW, or
 refer to the documentation that accompanies the autopilot.                  ADVANCE WAYPOINT softkey.
                                                                           · When you arrive at a target waypoint.
You can access the autopilot control functions using the softkeys.
If you are using the G-Series Command Center keyboard you can
also access these functions using the dedicated Dodge, Standby,
and Pilot buttons on the keyboard:
· Press the PILOT button at any time to display the Pilot Control
  dialog.
· Press the STANDBY button at any time to display the Pilot Control
  dialog and place the autopilot into Standby mode.
· Press the DODGE button at any time to display the Pilot Dodge
  Control dialog (requires a SeaTalkng autopilot).

 Note: To control an autopilot from a G-Series keyboard the
 Autopilot Control option in the System Integration menu must be
 set to ENABLED.

With the Autopilot Control function enabled, you can use your
keyboard to:
· Engage the autopilot and instruct it to follow a route, or a waypoint.
· Disengage the autopilot.
· Silence the waypoint arrival alarm.

Pilot Control dialog
The autopilot control functions on your multifunction display are
centered around the Pilot Control dialog. This dialog is displayed in
the following situations:
· When you press the PILOT button on the keyboard.
Using autopilot control                                                                                                                   109
7.4 Autopilot dialog box                                                  7.5 Autopilot control options
The autopilot dialog box provides important information when              Your multifunction display enables you to navigate to target
navigating using the integrated autopilot controls.                       waypoints using the autopilot control options.
The following information is displayed:                                   When you arrive at a waypoint, the Pilot Control dialog is displayed,
                                                                          providing the following options:
· Autopilot information, including status and heading.
                                                                           Option                            Description
· Waypoint information, including name, bearing and distance.
                                                                           ENGAGE PILOT -- TRACK             Engages the autopilot and continues
· Turn angle. The turn angle is only available for SPX autopilots
                                                                                                             to the next waypoint in the route. This
  connected using SeaTalkng. This indicates the direction and
                                                                                                             option is not available if you have
  severity of turns to be made under autopilot.
                                                                                                             reached the last waypoint in the route.
Example autopilot dialog                                                   CLEAR ALARM                       Silences the waypoint arrival alarm.
                                                                                                             Continues on the current heading.
                                                                           STANDBY                           Cancels the waypoint arrival alarm
                                                                                                             and disengages the autopilot.
                                                                           AUTO                              Cancels the waypoint arrival alarm and
                                                                                                             engages the autopilot in auto mode. If
                                                                                                             you just arrived at the last waypoint in
                                                                                                             the route, the autopilot continues on
                                                                                                             the current locked heading.


                                                                          Engaging the autopilot
                                                                          In the chart application:
                                                                          1. Select the NAVIGATION softkey.
Waypoint arrival                                                          2. Select the GOTO CURSOR, FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS, or
When arriving at a waypoint, the dialog title bar turns red to indicate       GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey, as appropriate.
the waypoint arrival alarm.                                               3. Select the ENGAGE PILOT -- TRACK softkey.
· Select ACKNOWLEDGE to silence the alarm.                                    The Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
                                                                          4. Select the appropriate softkey to engage the autopilot.
· Select STANDBY for manual steering.


110                                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
Engaging the autopilot using hotspotting                            7.6 Dodge control
In the chart application:
                                                                    The Dodge Control function enables you to temporarily set the
1. Position the cursor over a waypoint, or a waypoint in a route.   autopilot in standby mode when you encounter an obstacle.
    The softkeys change to provide further options.                 Examples of obstacles you might encounter include crab pots or
2. Select the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.                                other vessels steering into your path.
3. Select the ENGAGE PILOT -- TRACK softkey.                        Before you use the Dodge Control you must manually steer your
                                                                    vessel around the obstacle. When you take action to avoid the
Disengaging the autopilot                                           obstacle, the deviation from your course (or track) is known as
                                                                    Cross Track Error (XTE), as shown in the following diagram:
In the chart application with the autopilot engaged:
1. Press the STOP GOTO or STOP FOLLOW softkeys:
    The Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
2. Press the STANDBY softkey.
    The autopilot is disengaged, and put in standby mode.




Using autopilot control                                                                                                               111
                                                                                               3
                                                         3



                                                                                  2
                         2




                                                                              1
                    1




1. Cross Track Error (XTE).                                           Dodge

2. Obstacle.
3. Target waypoint.
Once you are clear of the obstacle you can use the Dodge Control
function to instruct the autopilot what to do next, as shown in the
following diagram:


112                                                                                   G-Series User reference
When the DODGE button is pressed the Pilot Control dialog is                  Avoiding an obstacle and plotting a new course
displayed and the autopilot stops steering your vessel. The Pilot             (Dodge)
Control dialog gives you the following options, depending on the
mode the pilot was in when you pressed the DODGE button:                      With the autopilot engaged:
 Auto mode                           Track mode                               1. Press the DODGE button on your keyboard or SeaTalkng
                                                                                 autopilot control head.
 Follow the current heading          Restart XTE and track from the current      The autopilot is set to Standby mode, and the Pilot Control
                                     position                                    dialog is displayed.
 Follow the last heading             Resume the current track                 2. Use the relevant manual controls on your vessel or the controls
                                                                                 on your autopilot control head to steer your vessel around the
 Note: To determine the mode that the pilot is in at any point, refer            obstacle.
 to the autopilot icons in the status bar, displayed in the top-right of      3. If you are in AUTO mode, press the AUTO softkey to follow the
 your display. These icons are described in this chapter.                        current heading. If you are in TRACK mode, press DODGE again
                                                                                 to restart XTE and resume the course to your target waypoint.
 Note: The Dodge Control function only applies to systems with
 a SeaTalkng autopilot. If you press the DODGE button when a                  Avoiding an obstacle and continuing with
 SeaTalk1 autopilot is connected, a warning message is displayed              autopilot disengaged (Dodge)
 and the Dodge Control function is not available.
                                                                              With the autopilot engaged:
                                                                              1. Press the DODGE button on your keyboard or SeaTalkng
Avoiding an obstacle and reverting to original                                   autopilot control head.
route (Dodge)                                                                    The autopilot is set to Standby mode, and the Pilot Control
With the autopilot engaged:                                                      dialog is displayed.
1. Press the DODGE button on your keyboard or SeaTalkng                       2. Use the relevant manual controls on your vessel or the controls
   autopilot control head.                                                       on your autopilot control head to steer your vessel around the
                                                                                 obstacle.
   The autopilot is set to Standby mode, and the Pilot Control
   screen is displayed.                                                       3. Press OK or CANCEL, or set the pilot to standby to continue
                                                                                 without re-engaging the autopilot.
2. Use the relevant manual controls on your vessel or the controls
   on your autopilot control head to steer your vessel around the
   obstacle.
3. If you were in AUTO mode, press the DODGE button again to
   re-engage the autopilot on the original heading. If you were in
   TRACK mode, press the ENGAGE PILOT - TRACK softkey to
   re-engage the autopilot on the original track.
Using autopilot control                                                                                                                       113
7.7 Autopilot status symbols                                Symbol   Description

The autopilot status is indicated in the databar.                    Power steering active.

 Symbol                     Description
                            Autopilot is in Standby mode.
                                                                     Wind Vane mode is active.


                            Autopilot is in Track mode.



                            Autopilot is in Auto mode.



                            No autopilot detected.



                            Autopilot alarm active.



                            Dodge mode is active.



                            Fish mode is active.



                            Autopilot calibration.




114                                                                                           G-Series User reference
7.8 Autopilot alarms
The autopilot functions provide alarms to alert you to situations that
require action.
Your multifunction display shows autopilot alarms, regardless of
whether there is active navigation on the system. If pilot integration
is enabled, and an alarm is raised by the autopilot, the multifunction
display provides an audible alarm sound (providing that the alarm
has not already been silenced). The Pilot Control screen is
displayed, indicating a new alarm. Additionally, the pilot transducer
icon is displayed in red, and remains red until the alarm is cleared.

Silencing autopilot alarms
1. Press the CLEAR ALARM softkey.
The alarm is silenced and the autopilot remains engaged in auto
mode, continuing on the current heading.

Silencing autopilot alarms and disengaging
autopilot
1. Press the STANDBY softkey.
The alarm is silenced, and the autopilot is disengaged and put in
standby mode.




Using autopilot control                                                  115
116   G-Series User reference
Chapter 8: Using alarms and MOB functions

Chapter contents
·    8.1 Using Man Overboard (MOB) functions on page 118
·    8.2 Alarms on page 119




Using alarms and MOB functions                             117
8.1 Using Man Overboard (MOB)                                         Note: To obtain a MOB position, your multifunction display must
functions                                                             have a GPS position fix.


Man overboard                                                        Cancelling a MOB alarm
If you lose a person or object overboard, you can use the Man        1. Press and hold the WPTS/MOB button for four seconds.
Overboard (MOB) function to mark the position.                          Once the MOB alarm is cleared:
The MOB function is available at all times, regardless of which         · the chart application motion mode is reset.
application is running.
                                                                        · the databar mode is reset.
When MOB is activated, an alert message appears on-screen, and
an emergency waypoint is created. A bearing to the waypoint is          · GOTO and route functions are restored.
also provided. The alert and emergency waypoint also appear on
any networked displays at the same time.                             MOB chart application
                                                                     If a MOB is raised while the chart application or the home screen
                                                                     is displayed, a special MOB chart application is started to help you
                                                                     locate the source of the distress signal.
                                                                     The special MOB chart application is displayed on your multifunction
                                                                     display and any other networked multifunction display(s). The
                                                                     special MOB chart application has the following features and
                                                                     settings:
                                                                     · A MOB symbol is placed at the position of the vessel when the
                                                                       MOB button was pressed.
                                                                     · The chart is set to Auto Range Motion Mode, and the chart scale
                                                                       is set to the lowest setting that maintains the vessel and MOB
                                                                       waypoint on-screen at the same time.
                                                                     · If the vessel moves away from the MOB position, the system
                                                                       draws a dotted line joining the MOB position with the vessel
                                                                       position.
Activating the man overboard function
                                                                     · GOTO and Route functions are disabled.
1. Press and hold the WPTS/MOB button for 3 seconds.
                                                                     · Chart detail is set to low.
   The normal chart application is reset to the same settings that
   it had before the MOB alarm was raised.                           · All other chart controls, including overlays, are set to their default
                                                                       settings.

118                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
· MOB position data is displayed in the databar along the top of         8.2 Alarms
  the screen.
                                                                         Alarms alert you to a situation or hazard requiring your attention.
· Any chart settings that you make to the special MOB chart
  application will not be saved.                                         You can set up alarms to alert you to certain conditions, such as
                                                                         collision warnings and temperature limits.
When you cancel the MOB alarm, the special MOB chart application
is closed.                                                               Alarms are raised by system functions, and also external equipment
                                                                         connected to your multifunction display.
The normal chart application is reset to the same settings that it had
before the MOB alarm was raised.                                         When an alarm sounds, a message dialog is displayed on your
                                                                         multifunction display, and any networked displays. The dialog
Responding to a MOB alarm on the home screen                             explains the reason for the alarm.
With the home screen and a MOB alert displayed:                          You can configure the behaviour of the following system and
1. Select the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.                                       application alarms using the Alarms Setup Menu:
   The alarm is silenced and a special MOB chart application is          · System alarms.
   displayed.
                                                                         · Navigation alarms.
                                                                         · Radar alarms.
                                                                         · Fishfinder alarms.
                                                                         · AIS alarms.

                                                                         Cancelling alarms
                                                                         1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.

                                                                         Accessing the alarms setup menu
                                                                         1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                         2. Select Alarm Setup.
                                                                            The Alarm Setup Menu is displayed.
                                                                         3. Select the appropriate alarm category.




Using alarms and MOB functions                                                                                                                 119
System alarm setup                                                       Menu item           Description                   Options
 Menu item             Description                 Options               Alarm Clock         When set to ON, an            · OFF (default)
                                                                                             alarm is triggered at
 Anchor Alarm          When set to ON,             · OFF (default)                           the time you specify for      · ON
                       the anchor alarm is                                                   the Alarm Clock Time
                       triggered when your         · ON
                                                                                             setting (see below).
                       vessel drifts from your
                       anchor position by more                           Alarm Clock Time    An alarm will sound at        · 00:00 (default)
                       than the distance you                                                 the time you specify for
                       specify for the Anchor                                                this setting.                 · 00.01 to 24:00 hrs
                       Alarm Radius setting
                       (see below).                                      Temperature Alarm   When set to ON,               · OFF (default)
                                                                                             triggers an alarm when
 Anchor Alarm Radius   Specifies the distance      0.01 to 9.99 nm (or                       the temperature you           · ON
                       your vessel must            equivalent units)                         specify for the Lower
                       drift away from its                                                   Temperature Limit or
                       anchor position before                                                Upper Temperature
                       the anchor alarm is                                                   Limit setting (see below)
                       triggered. The units                                                  is reached.
                       used for this setting are
                       based on the units you                            Lower Temperature   Specifies the lower           · 60 degrees
                       specify for distance in                           Limit               limit of the temperature        fahrenheit (default)
                       the Units Setup Menu.                                                 range that will trigger the
                                                                                             Temperature Alarm.            · ­09.9 to +99.7
 Timer                 When set to ON, counts      · OFF (default)                                                           degrees fahrenheit
                       down the time period                              Upper Temperature   Specifies the upper           · 75 degrees
                       you specify for the Timer   · ON
                                                                         Limit               limit of the temperature        fahrenheit (default)
                       Period setting (see                                                   range that will trigger the
                       below), and triggers                                                  Temperature Alarm.            · ­09.7 to 99.9 degrees
                       an alarm when zero is                                                                                 fahrenheit
                       reached.
 Timer Period          Specifies the countdown     · 00h00m (default)
                       period for the timer.
                       When the countdown          · 00h01m to 99h59m
                       reaches zero, an alarm
                       is triggered.


120                                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
Navigation alarms setup                                                        Menu item         Description                 Options
 Menu item                 Description                   Options               Collision Alarm   When Collision Alarm is     · OFF (default)
                                                                                                 set to ON, an alarm is
 Arrival Alarm Radius      When you arrive at a          0.01 to 9.99 nm (or                     triggered when charted      · ON
                           waypoint, an alarm is         equivalent units)                       objects appear in the
                           triggered. This setting                                               alarm zone's vicinity.
                           allows you to specify the                                             The zone is set up using
                           distance from the target                                              the Setup Alarm Zone
                           waypoint at which the                                                 setting (see below). You
                           alarm is triggered. The                                               must also set the Display
                           units used for this setting                                           Alarm Zone setting (see
                           are based on the units                                                below) to ON in order
                           you specify for distance                                              to view the zone in the
                           in the Units Setup Menu.                                              chart application.
 Offtrack Alarm            When set to ON, an            · OFF (default)
                           alarm is triggered when                                                Note: The accurate
                           your vessel steers            · ON                                     operation of the
                           off-track a greater                                                    collision alarm is
                           distance than the value                                                dependent on you
                           you specify for the                                                    supplying suitable
                           Offtrack Alarm XTE                                                     values for the Boat
                           setting (see below).                                                   Details setting
                                                                                                  (MENU > System
 Offtrack Alarm XTE        Specifies the distance        0.01 to 9.99 nm (or                      Setup > Boat
                           for the Offtrack Alarm        equivalent units)                        Details), which must
                           setting (see above).                                                   be appropriate for
                                                                                                  safe navigation. The
                                                                                                  values you specify
                                                                                                  must also take into
                                                                                                  account the position
                                                                                                  of the GPS antenna
                                                                                                  on your vessel, as
                                                                                                  the collision alarm
                                                                                                  uses data from the
                                                                                                  GPS antenna.



Using alarms and MOB functions                                                                                                                 121
 Menu item              Description                  Options              · the range in front of your vessel, which can be adjusted between
                                                                            0.05 and 2 nautical miles.
 Setup Alarm Zone       Enables you to specify
                        the zone for the Collision                        · the bearing from your vessel (width of the zone), which can be
                        Alarm setting (see                                  adjusted between 0 and 90.
                        above). When you                                  The collision alarm zone maintains its relative position to the vessel
                        select the Setup Alarm                            as its position and heading changes.
                        Zone menu item, you                               The following charted objects trigger an alarm when they enter the
                        can use the ADJUST                                collision alarm zone:
                        RANGE and ADJUST
                        ANGLE softkeys to                                 · Land:
                        define the zone. If you                             ­ Land.
                        access this menu item
                        while using the chart                               ­ Rocks.
                        application, a visual                               ­ Offshore structures.
                        indication of the alarm                             ­ Shoreline constructions.
                        zone is displayed when
                        you use the softkeys to                           · Depths:
                        define the zone.                                    ­ Depths.
 Display Alarm Zone     When set to ON, the          · OFF (default)      · Entry-restricted areas:
                        zone for the Collision                              ­ Anchorage areas.
                        Alarm (see above) is         · ON
                        displayed in the chart                              ­ Cables.
                        application.                                        ­ Fish areas.
                                                                            ­ Military areas.
Collision alarm
                                                                            ­ Offshore structures.
You can set up a collision alarm zone in front of your vessel to alert
you to charted objects above a specified depth, or below a specified        ­ Pipeline.
height.                                                                     ­ Waste areas.
If the Collision Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered when charted   · Submerged obstructions:
objects appear in the zone's vicinity. If an object exits the collision
                                                                            ­ Obstructions.
alarm zone and then re-enters it, a subsequent alarm is raised.
                                                                            ­ Wrecks.
You can specify the size of the collision alarm zone, which consists
of 2 sectors:                                                             · Overhead obstructions:
                                                                            ­ Cables.

122                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
     ­ Cultural features.                                                    7. Press the OK button to save the changes, or the CANCEL
                                                                                button to revert to the previously saved settings.
 Note: A dotted or dashed collision alarm zone indicates that
 there is insufficient cartographic information for the collision alarm
 to function correctly. In these situations, the collision alarm will        Radar alarms setup
 NOT function.                                                                Menu item                Description                   Options

Setting up the anti-collision alarm zone                                      Guard Zones              The guard zone feature        0 to 100%
                                                                              Sensitivity              in the radar application
                                                                                                       triggers an alarm when
                                                                                                       a target is within a
                                                                                                       specified zone. You can
                                                                                                       adjust the sensitivity of
                                                                                                       the alarm. Ensure that
                                                                                                       the sensitivity is not set
                                                                                                       too low, or targets may
                                                                                                       be missed and the alarm
                                                                                                       will not be triggered.


                                                                             Fishfinder alarms setup
                                                                  D11747-1
                                                                             This section describes the settings you can change using the
1. Press the MENU button.                                                    fishfinder alarms setup menu.
2. Select Alarm Setup.
                                                                              Menu Item                Description                   Options
3. Select Navigation Alarms Setup.
4. Select Setup Alarm Zone .                                                  Fish Alarm               Alarm which responds          OFF, ON
                                                                                                       to quantities of fishfinder
   If you are using the chart application when you access this menu                                    targets
   item, a visual indication of the alarm zone is displayed in front
   of the vessel icon.                                                        Fish Alarm Sensitivity   If the Fish Alarm is          1 to 10
5. To specify the range in front of your vessel that will be monitored,                                set to ON, an alarm is
   press the ADJUST RANGE softkey and use the rotary control to                                        triggered when the fish
   adjust the value.                                                                                   return strength reaches
                                                                                                       the sensitivity that you
6. To specify the bearing from your vessel (width of the zone),                                        specify.
   press the ADJUST ANGLE softkey and use the rotary control to
   adjust the value.

Using alarms and MOB functions                                                                                                                   123
 Menu Item                 Description                 Options              Menu Item                Description                 Options
 Fish Alarm Depth Limits   If the Fish Alarm and       OFF, ON              Deep Depth Alarm         Deep Depth Alarm            OFF, ON
                           this alarm is set to ON,                                                  Switches the deep depth
                           an alarm is triggered                                                     alarm on or off. If a DSM
                           (2 beeps) if any target                                                   is not connected, this
                           meets the sensitivity                                                     cannot be set.
                           level and is within the
                           Shallow Fish Limit and                           Deep Depth Alarm Value   If the Deep Depth Alarm     0002 ft to maximum
                           Deep Fish Limit that you                                                  is set to ON, an alarm      transducer range
                           specify.                                                                  is triggered if the depth
                                                                                                     exceeds the value that
 Shallow Fish Limit        Specifies the lower value   0002 ft to 1000 ft                            you specify.
                           for the Fish Alarm Depth
                           Limit.
                                                                            AIS alarms setup
 Deep Fish Limit           Specifies the upper         0002 ft to 1000 ft
                           value for the Fish Alarm                         Menu item                Description                 Options
                           Depth Limit
                                                                            Dangerous Targets        When set to ON, the         · ON (default)
 Shallow Depth Alarm       Switches the shallow        OFF, ON              Alarm                    alarm for dangerous AIS
                           depth alarm on or off. If                                                 targets is enabled.         · OFF
                           a DSM is not connected,
                           this cannot be set.                              AIS Alarm List           Displays the AIS
                                                                                                     Alarms List, which
 Shallow Depth Alarm       If the Shallow Depth        0002 ft to maximum                            details the identity,
 Value                     Alarm is set to ON, an      transducer range                              description, time, and
                           alarm is triggered if the                                                 acknowledgement
                           depth drops below the                                                     status of alarm
                           value you specify.                                                        messages received
                                                                                                     from an AIS receiver.




124                                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
Chapter 9: Using radar

Chapter contents
·    9.1 Radar overview on page 126
·    9.2 Digital radar scan speed on page 126
·    9.3 Radar scanner status symbols on page 127
·    9.4 Radar range and image quality on page 128
·    9.5 Radar display overview on page 131
·    9.6 Dual range radar operation on page 133
·    9.7 Radar mode and orientation on page 134
·    9.8 Radar tuning: HD and SuperHD digital scanners on page 137
·    9.9 Radar tuning: non-HD digital radomes on page 142
·    9.10 Using radar to measure distances, ranges, and bearings on page 146
·    9.11 Using radar to track targets and avoid collisions on page 150
·    9.12 Radar setup menu options on page 154




Using radar                                                                    125
9.1 Radar overview                                                     9.2 Digital radar scan speed
Radar is used to provide information that can help you to track        Certain digital radar scanners support multiple scan speeds.
targets and measure distances and bearings.                            Radar scan speed is set up using the Digital Scanner Setup Menu,
Radio Detection And Ranging (RADAR) is used at sea to detect the       accessible from the Radar Setup menu. When the system detects a
presence of objects (known as `targets') at a distance, and if they    scanner that is capable of operating at both 24 RPM and 48 RPM,
are moving, detect their speed.                                        2 options are provided for scanner speed:
Radar works by transmitting radio pulses, then detecting reflections   · 24 RPM
of these pulses (echoes) from objects in the area and displaying the
reflections as targets on your display.                                · Auto
Until you are familiar with interpreting the radar display, every      If you have a digital radar scanner that only operates at 24 RPM,
opportunity should be taken to compare the radar screen patterns       the scanner speed option is disabled. If the scanner speed option
with visual targets, such as other boats, buoys and coastal            is enabled, you must select the Auto option if you want to use the
structures. You should practise harbor and coastal navigation during   higher scan speeds. This option automatically switches between the
daylight hours and in clear weather conditions.                        24 RPM and 48 RPM scan speeds as appropriate.

HD and SuperHD digital radar                                           Selecting radar scanner speed
Your multifunction display can be used with digital radar scanners.    The speed option requires a 48 RPM compatible SuperHD digital
                                                                       radar scanner.
HD and SuperHD Digital radar scanners provide a range of
advantages, making it easier to discern objects around your vessel.    Select your radar scanner speed from within the radar application.
HD and SuperHD Digital radar scanners provide:                         1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                       2. Select Radar Setup > Scanner Speed menu options.
· Improved target detection.
                                                                       3. Select the Scanner Speed menu item and the appropriate speed
· Full-color image.                                                       setting:
· Dual Range operation.                                                   · Auto
· SuperHD option. This effectively increases the transmitter power        · 24 RPM
  by a factor of at least 2, and reduces the beamwidth by a similar
  amount.                                                                 The Auto option automatically selects the appropriate speed
                                                                          for your radar range. 48 RPM is used at radar ranges of up
 Note: You must connect a SuperHD radar scanner in order to               to 3 nm. It provides an increased refresh rate, which is useful
 use the SuperHD option.                                                  at high speed or in areas where you have large numbers of
                                                                          radar targets. At radar ranges of greater than 3 nm the display
                                                                          switches the radar speed to 24 RPM.

126                                                                                                                    G-Series User reference
9.3 Radar scanner status symbols                                                Powering the radar scanner on and off
                                                                                In the radar application:
The radar scanner power mode status is indicated in the databar.
                                                                                1. Press the POWER button on your multifunction display.
                         Radar
                                                                                2. Using the relevant softkeys, select the operating mode for the
                         power
                                                                                    radar scanner.
 Symbol                  mode       Description
                         Transmit   Rotating icon, signifying that the
                         (TX)       scanner is on and transmitting. When
                                    SCANNER is set to ON, select this
                                    mode to activate the scanner. This is
                                    the usual mode of operation.
                         Standby    Static icon, indicating that the scanner
                         (STBY)     is on but not transmitting, and the
                                    antenna is not rotating. The scanner
                                    does not transmit and the radar data
                                    is removed from the screen. This is
                                    a power-save mode used when the
                                    radar is not needed for short time
                                    periods. When you return to transmit
                                    mode, the magnetron does not need
                                    to warm up again. This is the default
                                    mode.
                         Off        Scanner powered off when radar not
                                    required, but display is in use for other
                                    applications, such as the chart. When
                                    selected, the system counts down.
                                    During this time you cannot re-power
                                    the scanner.
                         Timed      Scanner switches between
                         Transmit   on/transmitting, and standby
                                    mode. Scanner goes into power save
                                    mode when constant use of radar is
                                    not required.


Using radar                                                                                                                                     127
9.4 Radar range and image quality                                                                              Radar image quality
                                                                                                               A number of factors can affect the quality of a radar image, including
Maximum radar range                                                                                            echoes, sea clutter, and other interference.
The usable range of the radar is limited by factors such as the                                                Not all radar echoes are produced by valid targets. Spurious echoes
height of the scanner, and height of the target.                                                               may be caused by:
Maximum radar range is essentially line-of-sight, so is limited by                                             · Side lobes.
the height of the scanner and the height of the target as illustrated
below:                                                                                                         · Indirect echoes.

                                                Rmax
                                                                                                               · Multiple echoes.
                              a1                                       a2                                      · Blind sectors.

      h
                                               Earth                                                           · Sea, rain, or snow clutter.
          Radar                                                                                  H
                                       Rmax = 2.23 (   h +   H   )                       Cliff                 · Interference.
                       Rmax              maximum radar range         in nautical miles
                       h                 radar antenna height        in metres                                 Through observation, practice, and experience, you can generally
                       H                 target height               in metres
                                                                                                               detect these conditions very quickly and use the radar controls to
                  Rmax = radar horizon of antenna a
                                                  ( 1) + radar horizon of target a




                                                                                                     D1643-3
                                                                                 ( 2)
                                                                                                               minimize them.

                                                                                                               Side Lobes
The table below shows typical maximum radar ranges for various
radar antenna heights and target heights. Remember that although                                               Side lobe patterns are produced by small amounts of energy from
the radar horizon is greater than the optical horizon, the radar                                               the transmitted pulses that are radiated outside the narrow main
can only detect targets if a large enough target is above the radar                                            beam. The effects of side lobes are most noticeable with targets at
horizon.                                                                                                       short ranges (normally below 3 nm), and in particular with larger
                                                                                                               objects. Side lobe echoes form either arcs on the radar screen
 Antenna height                    Target height                         Maximum range                         similar to range rings, or a series of echoes forming a broken arc.
 (meters)                          (meters)                              (Nautical miles)
 3                                 3                                     7.7
 3                                 10                                    10.9
 5                                 3                                     8.8
 5                                 10                                    12




128                                                                                                                                                             G-Series User reference
                                   Main lobe                                      Multiple Echoes
                                                                                  Multiple echoes are not very common but can occur if there is a large
                            Side             Side                                 target with a wide vertical surface at a comparatively short range.
                            lobe             lobe                                 The transmitted signal will be reflected back and forth between the
                                                                                  target and your own ship, resulting in multiple echoes, displayed
                                   Antenna                                        beyond the range of the true target echo, but on the same bearing.
                                                                                                                                          True echo




                                                                                                                       Multiple echoes



                                                 D1638-4
     Arc        True echo          Side echoes




                                                                                                                                                         D1642-3
Indirect Echoes                                                                   Blind Sectors
There are several types of indirect echoes or ghost images. These                 Obstructions such as funnels and masts near the radar antenna
sometimes have the appearance of true echoes, but in general they                 may obstruct the radar beam and cause radar shadows or `blind
are intermittent and poorly defined.                                              sectors'. If the obstruction is relatively narrow, there will be a
                                                                                  reduction of the beam intensity, though not necessarily a complete
                                                                                  cut-off. However, for wider obstructions there may be a total loss of
   False echo                True echo                     True echo              signal in the shadow area. There may also be multiple echoes which
                                                                                  extend behind the obstruction. Blind sector effects can normally be
                                                                                  minimized by careful selection of the scanner site prior to installation.

                                                                                  Sea Clutter
                                                                                  Radar returns from waves around the vessel can clutter the centre
                                                                                  of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets. Such
                                                                                  `sea clutter' usually appears as multiple echoes on the display at
   Passing                                Mast                                    short range scales, and the echoes are not repetitive or consistent
   ship                                   or funnel        False echo
                                                                        D1641-4




                                                                                  in position. With high winds and extreme conditions, echoes from
                                                                                  sea clutter may cause dense background clutter in the shape of
                                                                                  an almost solid disc.


Using radar                                                                                                                                            129
                                                                   Interference
                                                                   When two or more radar-equipped vessels are operating within
                                                                   range of each other mutual radar interference can occur. This
                                                                   usually appears as a spiral of small dots from the display centre This
                                                                   type of interference is most noticeable at long ranges.




                                      D3968-4
Rain or Snow Clutter
The radar can see echoes from rain or snow. Returns from storm
areas and rain squalls consist of countless small echoes that




                                                                                                            D6601-2
continuously change size, intensity and position. These returns
sometimes appear as large hazy areas, depending on the intensity
of the rainfall or snow in the storm cell.
                                      D3967-4




130                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
9.5 Radar display overview                                           Item                   Description
With your radar scanner connected and the radar in transmit mode,    7                      Ship's position
the radar picture provides a map-like representation of the area
in which the radar is operating.                                     8                      Motion Mode

                                                     10
                                                                     9                      Radar scanner status
  1           2   3    4      5     6   7   8   9             11
                                                                     10                     Waypoint
                                                                     11                     Range ring spacing

                                                                    Typically, your vessel's position is at the center of the display, and
                                                                    its dead ahead bearing is indicated by a vertical heading line, known
                                                                    as the Ship's Heading Marker (SHM).
                                                                    On-screen targets may be large, small, bright or faint, depending on
                                                                    the size of the object, its orientation and surface. If using a non-HD
                                                                    digital radome scanner, strongest target returns are displayed in
                                                                    yellow with weaker returns in 2 shades of blue. If using an HD or
                                                                    SuperHD digital radar scanner, stronger target returns show as
                                                                    different colors from a range of 256 colors, providing better clarity.
                                                                    Be aware that the size of a target on screen is dependent on many
                                                                    factors and may not necessarily be proportional to its physical size.
                                                                    Nearby objects may appear to be the same size as distant larger
                                                                    objects.
                                                                    With experience, the approximate size of different objects can be
                                                                    determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes.
 Item                 Description                                   You should bear in mind that the size of each on-screen target is
 1                    Range                                         affected by:

 2                    Databar                                       · The physical size of the reflecting object.
                                                                    · The material from which the object is made. Metallic surfaces
 3                    Range ring                                      reflect signals better than non-metallic surfaces.
 4                    Land mass                                     · Vertical objects such as cliffs reflect signals better than sloping
 5                    Orientation                                     objects such as sandbanks.
                                                                    · High coastlines and mountainous coastal regions can be observed
 6                    Ship's Heading Marker (SHM)
                                                                      at longer radar ranges. Therefore, the first sight of land may be a
Using radar                                                                                                                             131
  mountain several miles inland from the coastline. Although the    4. Select the EDIT NAME softkey.
  coastline may be much nearer, it may not appear on the radar         The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
  until the vessel is closer to shore.
                                                                    5. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a name for the scanner,
· Some targets, such as buoys and small boats, can be difficult        then select SAVE.
  to discern, because they do not present a consistent reflecting
  surface as they bob and toss about in the waves. Consequently
  these echoes tend to fade and brighten, and at times disappear
  momentarily.
· Buoys and small boats often resemble each other, but boats can
  often be distinguished by their motion.
 Note: A GPS receiver and a fast heading sensor are required
 for MARPA operation, and to maximize radar/chart overlay
 performance.


Assigning a scanner to a radar display
If your system has 2 radar scanners you can select which one to
use for the current radar view.
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Radar Setup.
3. Select the Select Scanner menu item.
    A list of connected scanners is displayed.
4. Select the scanner you want to use with the current radar
    application.

Naming a radar scanner
You can name radar scanners for easy identification.
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Radar Setup.
3. Highlight the Select Scanner menu item.

132                                                                                                               G-Series User reference
9.6 Dual range radar operation                                         Dual range radar compatibility
                                                                       The range covered by the short Dual Range option depends on the
The Dual Range radar function enables you to view 2 ranges at the
                                                                       radar scanner you are using, and the software version it is using.
same time in separate windows. The function is only available with
HD and SuperHD radar scanners.                                                                           Range covered     Range covered
Using your multifunction display and an HD or SuperHD digital                                            by software       by software
radar scanner, you can view either a short or a long range image in                        Dual range    versions 1.xx     versions 3.xx
separate radar windows.                                                 Scanner            mode          to 2.xx           onwards
The default setting is Long, which provides a standard scanner          4 Kw HD Digital    Long          1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
range.                                                                  Open Array
                                                                                           Short         1/8 nm to 3 nm    1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        4 Kw SuperHD       Long          1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        Digital Open
                                                                        Array
                                                                                           Short         1/8 nm to 3 nm    1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        12 Kw HD Digital   Long          1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        Open Array
                                                                                           Short         1/8 nm to 3 nm    1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        12 Kw SuperHD      Long          1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
                                                                        Digital Open
                                                                        Array
Limitations                                                                                Short         1/8 nm to 3 nm    1/8 nm to 72 nm
· Dual Range operation is not available if MARPA targets are active.    HD Digital         Long          1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
· You cannot acquire MARPA targets if Dual Range is enabled.            Radome

· Chart-sync and chart overlay are temporarily disabled when Dual                          Short         1/8 nm to 72 nm   1/8 nm to 72 nm
  Range is enabled.




Using radar                                                                                                                              133
Using Dual Range with SuperHD scanners                             9.7 Radar mode and orientation
Dual range radar operation with SuperHD scanners.
When using the short Dual Range option, a SuperHD scanner
                                                                   Radar orientation modes
operates in HD mode only. When using the long Dual Range option,   The radar can operate in a number of orientation modes to suit
a SuperHD radar operates in SuperHD mode.                          different types of navigation.
 Scanner                 Dual Range mode    Operating mode         The orientation of the radar refers to the relationship between the
                                                                   radar and the direction that you are travelling in. There are three
 4 Kw SuperHD Digital    Long               SuperHD                orientation modes to choose from:
 Open Array
                                                                   · Head up.
                         Short              HD
                                                                   · North up.
 12 Kw SuperHD Digital   Long               SuperHD
 Open Array                                                        · Course up.

                         Short              HD                     These orientation modes are used in conjunction with motion mode
                                                                   to control how your boat and radar relate to one another and how
                                                                   they are displayed on screen. Any changes that you make to the
Enabling Dual Range radar operation                                orientation of the radar are retained when you switch off your
                                                                   multifunction display.
In the radar application, with an HD or SuperHD radar scanner
connected to your multifunction display:                           Head Up (H-UP)
1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.                                This is the default mode for the radar application.
2. Select the ON option for the DUAL RANGE softkey.                       e.g:
                                                                                         N

Selecting long or short range radar operation
In the radar application:
1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Use the DUAL RANGE softkey to select the LONG or SHORT
    option, as appropriate.
                                                                                                                                N
                                                                             Ship's Heading Marker (SHM)      As your boat's heading changes:
                                                                             (indicating the boat's current     SHM fixed upwards
                                                                             heading) is upwards




                                                                                                                                                    D8398_1
                                                                                                                Radar picture rotates accordingly




134                                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
North Up (N-UP)                                                                   Course Up (C-UP)
          e.g:                                                                            e.g:

                         N                       N                                                          N                          N




                                     As your boat's heading changes:                                                       As your boat's heading changes:
                 True north at top                                                               Current course upwards
                                       Radar picture fixed (north up)                                                        Radar picture fixed
                                       SHM rotates accordingly                                                               SHM rotates accordingly




                                                                                                                                                              D8400_1
                                                                        D8399_1
                                                                                  If you select a new course, the picture will reset to display the new
 Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode,                   course upwards.
 a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates
                                                                                  The reference used for Course-Up depends upon the information
 North-Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative
                                                                                  available at a given time. The system always prioritizes this
 motion. When heading data becomes available once more,
                                                                                  information in the following order:
 North-Up mode is reinstated.
                                                                                  1. Bearing from origin to destination, that is, intended course.
 Note: It is not possible to select Head Up mode when the motion                  2. Locked heading from an Autopilot.
 mode is set to True.                                                             3. Bearing to waypoint.
                                                                                  4. Instantaneous heading.
                                                                                   Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode,
                                                                                   a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates the
                                                                                   Course Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative
                                                                                   motion. When heading data becomes available once more,
                                                                                   Course-Up mode is reinstated.

                                                                                  Selecting the radar orientation mode
                                                                                  In the radar application:
                                                                                  1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
Using radar                                                                                                                                                  135
2. Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
3. Using the ORIENTATION softkey, select the required orientation
   mode.

Changing the radar vessel offset
In   the radar application:
1.    Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
2.    Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.




                                                                                                                                               D6842-2
                                                                                   0 offset            1/ offset               2/ offset
3.    Using the VESSEL OFFSET softkey, select the required vessel                                        3                       3

      offset.
                                                                        The default motion mode is "Relative", with zero offset.
Radar motion modes overview                                             True Motion (TM)
The motion mode controls the relationship between the radar and         When the motion mode is set to True, fixed radar targets maintain a
your boat. There are two modes:                                         constant position and moving vessels (including your boat) travel
· Relative motion.                                                      in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses on the
                                                                        screen. As the boat's position approaches the edge of the screen,
· True motion.                                                          the radar picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead.
The selected motion mode is displayed in the status bar. The default     Note: If heading and position data become unavailable when
setting is relative motion with zero offset.                             True motion is selected, a warning message will be shown, the
                                                                         mode will revert to relative motion and be noted in the status bar
Relative Motion (RM) with optional Vessel Offset                         in brackets, for example, (TM).
When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your boat
is fixed on the screen and all the targets move relative to the boat.    Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation
You can specify whether the boat is fixed in the centre of the window    is set to Head Up.
(0 offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3 to increase the view ahead, as
shown below:
                                                                        Selecting the radar motion mode
                                                                        In   the radar application:
                                                                        1.    Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                        2.    Press the RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey.
                                                                        3.    Using the MOTION MODE softkey, select the relevant mode.


136                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
9.8 Radar tuning: HD and SuperHD digital scanners
You can use the gain presets and other functions to improve the quality of the radar picture.
The following settings apply to HD radomes and HD and SuperHD
open array digital scanners:

 Tuning method                                            Related options                                            Description
 Gain presets                                             For each preset, the following options are available:      The digital radar gain presets enable you to quickly
                                                                                                                     select pre-configured settings to achieve the best
 · Buoy -- a special mode that enhances the               · Gain -- enables you to use a preset in automatic         picture in different situations. Raymarine strongly
   detection of small objects like mooring buoys. It is     mode, or to adjust its gain manually between 0           recommends the use of these presets to achieve
   useful at ranges up to 0.75 nm.                          and 100%.                                                optimum results. However, each of the gain presets
 · Harbor -- this is the default mode. This setting       · Color Gain-- adjusts the intensity (color) of            can be manually adjusted using gain, color gain, rain,
   takes account of land clutter so that smaller            displayed targets, but does not significantly affect     and sea gain functions.
   targets, like navigation buoys, are not lost.            the number of targets displayed. Increasing the
                                                            color gain causes more targets to be displayed in
 · Coastal -- accounts for the slightly higher levels       the same color, which may help you to determine
   of sea clutter you might encounter out of harbor         whether an object is an actual target, or just
   and adjusts the radar display accordingly.               background noise. Reducing the color gain may
 · Offshore -- automatically adjusts for high levels        provide better target detail and detection.
   of sea clutter.                                        · Rain -- the radar scanner detects echoes from
 · Bird Mode -- a special mode that helps you to            rain or snow. These echoes appear on screen
   identify flocks of birds, useful when identifying        as countless small echoes continuously changing
   suitable fishing locations, for example.                 size, intensity and position. Turning the rain clutter
                                                            function on suppresses the bulk effect of rain
                                                            returns from around your vessel, making it easier
                                                            to recognize other objects.
                                                          · Sea Gain -- radar echoes from waves around
                                                            your vessel can clutter the center of the radar
                                                            picture, making it difficult to detect real targets.
                                                            Adjusting the sea gain reduces this clutter for up
                                                            to 5 nautical miles (depending on wave and sea
                                                            conditions) from your vessel.
                                                          · SuperHD Controls -- for SuperHD scanners only:
Using radar                                                                                                                                                             137
 Tuning method                                            Related options                                            Description

                                                            ­ Antenna Boost: scales the effective antenna
                                                              size. At zero, the effective antenna size
                                                              matches its actual size. At 95%, the effective
                                                              antenna size is doubled. Increasing the effective
                                                              antenna size separates targets that appear
                                                              merged at lower settings.
                                                            ­ Power Boost: adjusts effective transmit power.
                                                              At zero, the radar operates at its standard power
                                                              (4kW or 12kW). At 90, the effective power is
                                                              increased by a factor of at least two. Increasing
                                                              the power makes targets more distinct from
                                                              noise. For maximum benefit, reduce power
                                                              boost to prevent saturation of strong targets.
 Enhance Echoes functions:                                INT. REJECTION:                                            The enhance echoes functions enable you to
                                                                                                                     minimize the negative effects of echoes on the radar
 · Interference rejection -- this function minimizes      · ON -- minimizes the effect of interference from          display.
   the effect of interference from other radar-eqipped      other radar-equipped vessels.
   vessels.
                                                          · OFF -- allows you to detect the presence of other
 · Expansion -- enables you to override the default         radars in the vicinity.
   radar pulse length, providing larger target returns.
                                                          EXPANSION:
 · Wakes -- enables you to see the direction and
   speed of moving targets relative to your vessel.       · ON -- increases the pulse length. This provides
                                                            larger target returns, making them easier to see.
                                                            However, larger returns may decrease target
                                                            resolution, and merge on the display.
                                                          · OFF -- this is the default setting. It provides better
                                                            range resolution, giving you more defined (but
                                                            smaller) target returns.
                                                          WAKES:
                                                          · ON -- shows the direction and speed of moving
                                                            targets relative to your vessel. Targets are

138                                                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
 Tuning method                                Related options                                           Description
                                                displayed in yellow, turning to paler shades of blue
                                                as the signal diminishes. If you have changed the
                                                color palette in use, target colors may be different.
                                                The wake options are: 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 5
                                                min, 10 min.
                                              · OFF -- does NOT show the direction and speed
                                                of moving targets in relation to your vessel.
 Tune control                                 · AUTO -- the default mode. The radar tunes itself        The radar tuning control enables you to fine-tune the
                                                automatically on all range scales. Raymarine            radar scanner's receiver for maximum target returns
                                                recommends that you leave the tune function in          on the display.
                                                AUTO mode to receive the maximum signal.
                                              · MANUAL -- enables you to manually set the
                                                tuning. Adjust the control to obtain the maximum
                                                signal strength. If you adjust the setting shortly
                                                after powering up the radar scanner, you should
                                                adjust it again approximately 10 minutes after
                                                powering up the scanner, as the required setting
                                                will change after the magnetron has warmed up.


Selecting digital radar gain presets                                       1. Select the GAIN softkey.
These presets require a HD or SHD digital radar scanner. Bird              2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
mode requires a scanner with the enhanced bird mode capability.               OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.
In the radar application:                                                  3. Select the same softkey again.
1. Press the GAIN softkey.                                                    The softkeys change to provide more options.
2. Press the BUOY MODE, HARBOUR MODE, COASTAL MODE,                        4. Use the GAIN softkey to select the MAN option.
    OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.                   5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
The softkey is highlighted, and the display changes to reflect the            appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
new mode.                                                                  6. Press the OK button.

Adjusting digital radar preset gain                                        Adjusting digital radar color gain
In the radar application:                                                  In the radar application:
Using radar                                                                                                                                                139
1. Select the GAIN softkey.                                      6. Press the OK button.
2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
   OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.          Adjusting SuperHD radar antenna boost
3. Select the same softkey again.
                                                                 In the radar application:
   The softkeys change to provide more options.
                                                                 1. Select the GAIN softkey.
4. Use the COLOR GAIN softkey to select the MAN option.
                                                                 2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the       OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.
   appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
                                                                 3. Select the same softkey again.
6. Press the OK button.
                                                                     The softkeys change to provide more options.
                                                                 4. Select the SUPER HD CONTROLS softkey.
Adjusting digital radar rain clutter                             5. Use the ANTENNA BOOST softkey to select the MAN option.
In the radar application:                                        6. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
1. Select the GAIN softkey.                                          appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,              7. Press the OK button.
    OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.
3. Select the same softkey again.                                Adjusting SuperHD radar power boost
    The softkeys change to provide more options.
                                                                 In the radar application:
4. Use the RAIN softkey to select the ON option.
                                                                 1. Select the GAIN softkey.
5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
                                                                 2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,
    appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
                                                                     OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.
6. Press the OK button.
                                                                 3. Select the same softkey again.
                                                                     The softkeys change to provide more options.
Adjusting digital radar sea gain                                 4. Select the SUPER HD CONTROLS softkey.
In the radar application:                                        5. Use the POWER BOOST softkey to select the MAN option.
1. Select the GAIN softkey.                                      6. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the
2. Select the BUOY MODE, HARBOR MODE, COASTAL MODE,                  appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).
    OFFSHORE MODE, or BIRD MODE softkey, as appropriate.         7. Press the OK button.
3. Select the same softkey again.
    The softkeys change to provide more options.
                                                                 Enhance echoes functions
4. Use the SEA softkey to select the MAN option.
5. Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the   Enabling radar interference rejection
    appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%).                    In the radar application:

140                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the INT. REJECTION softkey repeatedly until the ON
   option is selected.
3. Press the OK button.

Enabling radar expansion
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the EXPANSION softkey repeatedly until the ON option
    is selected.
3. Press the OK button.

Enabling radar wakes
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the WAKES softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
    selected.
3. Select the appropriate time period.

Adjusting the radar tune control
Inthe radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the Radar Setup menu item.
3. Select the Scanner Setup menu item.
4. Select the Tune menu item.
5. Select the MANUAL option, using the TUNE softkey.
6. Using the rotary control, adjust the level to obtain the maximum
   signal strength (indicated by the eight-step horizontal bar).
7. Press the OK button.



Using radar                                                           141
9.9 Radar tuning: non-HD digital radomes
You can use the gain presets and other functions to improve the quality of the radar picture.
The following settings apply to non-HD digital radomes:
 Tuning method                                 Related Options                                        Description
 Gain                                          · AUTO -- the preset operates in automatic mode.       Enables you to adjust the sensitivity of the radar
                                                 This is the default.                                 reception. In some situations, adjusting the sensitivity
                                                                                                      may improve the clarity of the radar picture.
                                               · MAN -- allows you to manually adjust the intensity
                                                 of the gain, from 0 to 100%.
 FTC function                                  · ON -- enables the FTC function and allows you to     Enables you to remove areas of clutter at a distance
                                                 adjust the setting between 0 and 100%.               from your vessel. It also helps you to distinguish
                                                                                                      between two very close echoes on the same bearing,
                                               · OFF -- disables the FTC function. This is the        which may otherwise merge and appear as one echo.
                                                 default.                                             You can adjust the intensity of the FTC function
                                                                                                      between 0 and 100%:
                                                                                                      · A higher setting shows only the leading edge of
                                                                                                        large (rain clutter) echoes, while the effect on
                                                                                                        smaller (ship) echoes is only slight.
                                                                                                      · A lower setting reduces background noise and
                                                                                                        fill-in returns from land and other large targets.
 Rain function                                 · ON -- enables the Rain function and allows you to    The radar scanner detects echoes from rain or
                                                 adjust the setting between 0 and 100%.               snow. These echoes appear on screen as countless
                                                                                                      small echoes continuously changing size, intensity
                                               · OFF -- disables the Rain function. This is the       and position. Turning the rain clutter function ON
                                                 default.                                             suppresses the bulk effect of rain returns from around
                                                                                                      your vessel, making it easier to recognize other
                                                                                                      objects. You can adjust the intensity of this setting
                                                                                                      between 0 and 100%.




142                                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
 Tuning method                                            Related Options                                            Description
 Sea gain presets:                                        · AUTO -- the preset operates in automatic mode.           Enable you to quickly select pre-configured settings
                                                            This is the default.                                     to achieve the best picture in different situations.
 · Harbor -- this is the default mode. This setting                                                                  Each of the gain presets has a gain function, which is
   takes account of land clutter so that smaller          · MAN -- allows you to manually adjust the intensity       set to automatic mode by default. Raymarine strongly
   targets, like navigation buoys, are not lost.            of the sea gain, from 0 to 100%.                         recommends the use of these presets to achieve
 · Coastal -- accounts for the slightly higher levels                                                                optimum results. However, you can adjust this gain
   of sea clutter you might encounter out of harbor                                                                  manually if required.
   and adjusts the radar display accordingly.
 · Offshore -- Automatically adjusts for high levels
   of sea clutter.
 Enhance Echoes functions:                                INT. REJECTION:                                            The enhance echoes functions enable you to
                                                                                                                     minimize the negative effects of echoes on the radar
 · Interference rejection -- this function minimizes      · ON -- minimizes the effect of interference from          display.
   the effect of interference from other radar-eqipped      other radar-equipped vessels. There are two
   vessels.                                                 settings -- NORMAL, and HIGH.
 · Expansion -- enables you to override the default       · OFF -- allows you to detect the presence of other
   radar pulse length, providing larger target returns.     radars in the vicinity.
 · Wakes -- enables you to see the direction and          EXPANSION:
   speed of moving targets relative to your vessel.
                                                          · ON -- increases the pulse length, giving larger
                                                            target returns that are easier to see. However,
                                                            larger returns may decrease target resolution, and
                                                            merge on the display. There are two settings --
                                                            LOW and HIGH.
                                                          · OFF -- this is the default setting. It provides better
                                                            range resolution,giving you more defined (but
                                                            smaller) target returns.
                                                          WAKES:
                                                          · ON -- you can see the direction and speed of
                                                            moving targets relative to your vessel. Targets are
                                                            displayed in yellow, turning to paler shades of blue

Using radar                                                                                                                                                             143
 Tuning method                                     Related Options                                        Description
                                                     as the signal diminishes. The options are: 10 sec,
                                                     30 sec, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min.
                                                   · OFF -- you will NOT be able to see the direction
                                                     and speed of moving targets in relation to your
                                                     vessel.
 Tune control                                      · AUTO -- the default mode. The radar tunes itself     The radar tuning control enables you to fine-tune the
                                                     automatically on all range scales. Raymarine         radar scanner's receiver for maximum target returns
                                                     recommends that you leave the tune function in       on the display.
                                                     AUTO mode to receive the maximum signal.
                                                   · MANUAL -- enables you to manually set the
                                                     tuning. Adjust the control to obtain the maximum
                                                     signal strength. If you adjust the setting shortly
                                                     after powering up the radar scanner, you should
                                                     adjust it again approximately 10 minutes after
                                                     powering up the scanner, as the required setting
                                                     will change after the magnetron has warmed up.


Adjusting radar gain                                                           Adjusting the radar rain function
In   the radar application:                                                    In   the radar application:
1.    Press the GAIN softkey.                                                  1.    Press the GAIN softkey.
2.    Press the GAIN softkey until the MAN option is selected.                 2.    Press the RAIN softkey until the ON option is selected.
3.    Using the rotary controller, adjust the gain control to the              3.    Using the rotary controller, adjust the Rain function to the
      appropriate setting.                                                           appropriate setting.

Adjusting the radar FTC function                                               Adjusting radar sea clutter
In   the radar application:                                                    In   the radar application:
1.    Press the GAIN softkey.                                                  1.    Press the GAIN softkey.
2.    Press the FTC softkey until the ON option is selected.                   2.    Press the SEA softkey.
3.    Using the rotary controller, adjust the FTC function to the              3.    Select the HARBOR, OFFSHORE, or COASTAL preset, as
      appropriate setting.                                                           appropriate.

144                                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
 Note: You can adjust the radar's sensitivity to sea clutter using   4. Select the Tune menu item.
 the MENU > Radar Setup > Scanner Setup > Sea Clutter                5. Select the MANUAL option, using the TUNE softkey.
 Curve menu item.
                                                                     6. Using the rotary control, adjust the level to obtain the maximum
                                                                        signal strength (indicated by the eight-step horizontal bar).
Enhance echoes functions                                             7. Press the OK button.

Enabling radar interference rejection
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the INT. REJECTION softkey repeatedly until the ON
    option is selected.
3. Press the OK button.
Enabling radar expansion
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the EXPANSION softkey repeatedly until the ON option
    is selected.
3. Press the OK button.
Enabling radar wakes
In the radar application:
1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey.
2. Press the WAKES softkey repeatedly until the ON option is
    selected.
3. Select the appropriate time period.

Adjusting the radar tune control
In   the radar application:
1.    Press the MENU button.
2.    Select the Radar Setup menu item.
3.    Select the Scanner Setup menu item.
Using radar                                                                                                                           145
9.10 Using radar to measure distances,                                e.g.

ranges, and bearings
When you are using the radar application, you can measure
distances, ranges and bearings in a variety of ways.
These options are detailed in the table below:
                                                                      Range -1/4 nm               Range - 3/4 nm              Range - 11/ nm
                                                                                                                                         2




                                                                                                                                                          D8407_1
                                                                      Range rings -1/8 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart
                  Distances        Range From
 Functions        Between Points   Your Vessel    Bearings
                                                                     Measuring using the cursor
 Range Rings      Yes              Yes            No
                  (approximate     (approximate                      To measure the bearing and range from your boat to a specified
                  distance)        range)                            target, move the cursor to the appropriate position on the screen.

 Cursor           No               Yes            Yes                Bearing and range from
                                                                     your vessel to cursor
 Variable Range   No               Yes            No
 Markers (VRMs)                                                                      Cursor

 Electronic       No               No             Yes
 Bearing Lines
 (EBLs)
 Floating VRMs    Yes              No             No




                                                                                                                                                          D8402_1
 Floating EBLs    No               No             Yes

Measuring using the range rings                                       Note: If cursor position is not shown in the Databar, go to Menu
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between        > Databar Setup > Configure.
points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen
and centred from your boat at pre-set distances. The number and      Measuring using Variable Range Markers (VRMs)
spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.                A Variable Range Marker (VRM) is a circle centred on your vessel's
                                                                     position and fixed with respect to the heading mode. When this
                                                                     circle is adjusted to align with a target, its range from your boat is
                                                                     measured and displayed on the ADJUST VRM softkey. The data is
                                                                     also displayed if you select the VRM with the cursor.


146                                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
                  VRM                                                                         EBL




                                                                                                          D8425_1
                                      D8408_1                          Note: The default bearing mode for EBLs is relative to your
                                                                       vessel's heading. If heading data is available, you can set the
Measuring using Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs)                        bearing mode to be relative (REL), magnetic/true (M/T). When
An Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) is a line drawn from your boat to     M/T is selected, the EBL bearings will be expressed as either
the edge of the window. When this line is rotated to align with a      true or magnetic, dependant on the equipment connected. The
target, its bearing relative to your boat's heading is measured and    current EBL bearing is shown on both the radar screen EBL label
displayed on the ADJUST EBL softkey. The data is also displayed if     and on the ADJUST EBL softkey.
you select the EBL with the cursor.
                                                                      Measuring using combined VRM and EBL
                                                                      A VRM and an EBL can be combined to measure both the range
                                                                      and the bearing of the specified target.




Using radar                                                                                                                         147
                                                                         Note: The first VRM/EBL will be placed at a location of 1/3 of
                    VRM    Target EBL                                    the current range and 030° relative to your vessel's head. If this
                                                                         setting is adjusted, the display will retain the adjustments and use
                                                                         them when the VRM/EBL is next enabled.


                                                                        Creating a floating VRM or EBL on the radar
                                                                        display
                                                                        In the radar application:
                                                                        1. If you have already created a VRM or EBL, skip to Step 8.
                                                                            Otherwise, follow Steps 2 to 12.
                                                                        2. Select the VRM/EBL softkey.
                                         D8403_1
                                                                        3. Select the ON option using the VRM/EBL 1 softkey.
                                                                            The VRM/EBL is displayed.
                                                                        4. Select the ADJUST VRM softkey.
Measuring using floating VRM and EBL
You can use the VRM/EBL float function to measure the range and         5. Using the rotary control, adjust the VRM to the required size.
bearing between any two points on the radar screen. This function       6. Select the ADJUST EBL softkey.
allows you to move the VRM/EBL centre away from your boat's             7. Using the rotary control, adjust the EBL to the required angle.
position and onto a target. You can then change the radius of the
                                                                        8. Position the cursor over the VRM or EBL.
VRM to determine the distance between two points and change the
angle of the EBL, relative to its new origin, to obtain the bearing.        The softkeys change to display the VRM/EBL options.
                                                                        9. Select the FLOATING EBL softkey.
Creating a VRM or EBL on the radar display                              10. Select the ADJUST FLOAT softkey.
In   the radar application:                                             11. Using the trackpad, move the center position of the circle to the
1.    Select the VRM/EBL softkey.                                           desired position.
2.    Select the ON option using the VRM/EBL 1 softkey.                 12. Press the CANCEL button to deselect the ADJUST FLOAT
3.    Using the rotary control, adjust the VRM to the required size.        softkey, and then CANCEL again to return to the previous level
                                                                            of softkeys.
4.    Select the ADJUST EBL softkey.
                                                                            The ADJUST VRM softkey displays the distance. The ADJUST
5.    Using the rotary control, adjust the EBL to the required angle.
                                                                            EBL softkey displays the bearing.
6.    Press the OK button to save the settings.
7.    Repeat Steps 1 to 6 to create a second VRM/EBL if required,
      this time using the VRM/EBL 2 softkey.

148                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
 Note: When creating the first VRM/EBL, it will be placed at a                                 2. Select Radar Setup.
 location of 1/3 of the current range and 030° relative to your                                3. Use the Range Rings menu option to switch Radar Rings ON
 vessel's head. If this setting is adjusted, the display will retain the                          or OFF.
 adjustments and use them when the VRM/EBL is next enabled.


Unfloating a VRM or EBL on the radar display
In   the radar application:
1.    Select the VRM/EBL softkey.
2.    Use the VRM/EBL 1 softkey to select the ON option.
3.    Select the FLOATING EBL softkey.
4.    Select the CENTER softkey.

Using the radar range rings
Radar range rings enable you to measure the distance between
two points on the radar display.
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between
points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen
and centred from your boat at pre-set distances. The number and
spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.

 e.g.




 Range -1/4 nm               Range - 3/4 nm              Range - 11/ nm
                                                                    2
                                                                                     D8407_1




 Range rings -1/8 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart   Range rings -1/4 nm apart



Enabling and disabling radar range rings
In the radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.
Using radar                                                                                                                                              149
9.11 Using radar to track targets and                                 3. Select Radar Alarms Setup.
avoid collisions                                                      4. Select Guard Zones Sensitivity.
                                                                      5. Use the rotary control or trackpad to adjust the sensitivity.
There are a number of radar functions to help you track targets and
avoid collisions, including Guard Zones, MARPA, and AIS.
                                                                      MARPA overview
With a radar connected to your multifunction display, you can:
                                                                      MARPA is used for target tracking and risk analysis in the radar
· Assess how far away a target is and its bearing (VRMs/EBLs).        application.
· Set an alarm to trigger when a target is within a specified zone    With an accurate heading sensor connected to your multifunction
  (Guard Zones).                                                      display, you can use the Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA)
· Display detailed information on tracked targets (MARPA).            functions for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA improves
                                                                      collision avoidance by calculating information for tracked targets,
· Display the identity of other vessels and if broadcasted, their     and provides continuous, accurate, and rapid situation evaluation.
  voyage information (AIS).                                           The number of targets that you can track at any one time is
· Display the range and bearing of a target.                          dependent on the model of radar scanner that you are using.
                                                                      MARPA tracks acquired targets, and calculates the target's speed
                                                                      and course.
Setting up a radar guard zone
                                                                      Each target tracked can be displayed with a graphic indicating the
Inthe radar application:                                              Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and Time to Closest Point of
1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey.                                 Approach (TCPA). The calculated target data can also be shown on
2. Press the MONITOR IN ZONES softkey.                                your screen. Each target is continually assessed and an audible
3. Press the ZONE 1 or ZONE 2 softkey (as appropriate) until the      alarm is sounded if a target becomes dangerous, or is lost.
   ON or OFF option is selected.                                      For effective MARPA operation, your multifunction display must
4. Press the SET UP ZONE 1 or SET UP ZONE 2 softkey, as               have accurate heading and speed data for your vessel. The better
   appropriate.                                                       the quality of the heading and speed data, the better MARPA will
                                                                      perform. For the best heading data, a Raymarine SMART heading
5. Press the ZONE SHAPE softkey until the SECTOR or CIRCLE
                                                                      sensor or a gyro-stabilized autopilot is required.
   option is selected, as required.
6. Use the softkeys and the rotary control to specify the guard       In True Motion mode, Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over
   zone, as appropriate.                                              Ground (COG) information is required to show true target course
                                                                      and speed.

Adjusting guard zone sensitivity                                      In Relative Motion mode, heading and speed information is required.

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Alarm Setup.

150                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
                                                                        · the symbol wanders away from the target, locks-on to another
                                                                          target, or changes to a lost symbol target.
                                                                        In these circumstances, target acquisition and tracking may need to
                                                                        be re-initiated and in some cases might be impossible to maintain.
                                                                        Better quality heading data might improve performance in these
                                                                        circumstances.

                                                                        How a MARPA risk is assessed
                                                                        Each target is monitored to ascertain whether it will be within a
                                                                        certain distance from your vessel within a certain time. If so, the
                                                                        target is designated as dangerous, and an audible warning is
                                                                        sounded and a warning displayed. The target symbol changes to
                                                                        the dangerous target symbol and flashes to indicate that it is a
                                                                        dangerous target. Selecting the appropriate softkey will silence the
                                                                        alarm and remove the warning.
Safety notices
                                                                        If a target is lost, either because the MARPA software has lost
MARPA can improve collision avoidance when used wisely. It is           contact with it, or because it has moved out of range, an audible
your responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational        alarm is sounded and an on-screen warning appears. The
judgement.                                                              on-screen symbol will change to the target lost symbol. Selecting
There are conditions where acquiring a target may become difficult.     the appropriate softkey will silence the alarm and remove the
These same conditions may be a factor in successfully tracking a        on-screen warning and the target lost symbol.
target. Some of the conditions are:
                                                                        Effective range for MARPA targets
· The target echo is weak. The target is very close to land, buoys
                                                                        MARPA target acquisition is only available at radar range scales of
  or other large targets.
                                                                        up to 12 nm, although tracking continues at all ranges.
· The target or your own vessel is making rapid manoeuvres.             If you change to a smaller range scale, targets may be beyond the
· Choppy sea state conditions exist and the target is buried in         range of your radar scanner and will be lost. In such cases, an
  excessive sea clutter or in deep swells.                              on-screen warning indicates that the target is off-screen.
· Choppy sea state conditions exist yielding poor stability; own        Status symbols for MARPA targets
  vessel's heading data is very unstable.
                                                                        Each target is shown in the radar application as a symbol, indicating
· Inadequate heading data.                                              its status:
Symptoms of such conditions include:
· target acquisition is difficult and the MARPA vectors are unstable;
Using radar                                                                                                                               151
                                                                             Relative mode
              Target being acquired           Dangerous target
                                                                             With the display set in Relative mode, no vector extension of your
                                                                             vessel is shown. The CPA line emerges from your own vessel, with




                                                                   D7542_2
              Safe target                  Lost target                       the target vector extension being shown as relative, not true. The
                                                                             text next to the target indicates its course and speed.

Vessel vectors (CPA graphics) overview                                       Configuring MARPA and AIS options
CPA graphics show vectors for your vessel and a selected target.             In   the radar application:
                                                                             1.    Select the TARGET TRACKING softkey.
A vector is a line on-screen showing the predicted courses of your
vessel and the selected target if you both remain on your present            2.    Select the MARPA AND AIS OPTIONS softkey.
course. These vectors vary in length due to vessel speed and vector          3.    Select the Vector Length menu item and adjust the time period
length set in the MARPA Setup menu.                                                as appropriate. The distance that your vessel travels in the time
                                                                                   period you specify here determines the length of the vector lines.
                                                                             4.    Select the Target History menu item to adjust the interval by
                                                                                   which a target's previous position is plotted on the radar display.
                                                                             5.    Select the Own Vessel Safe Zone menu item to specify the
                                                                                   range of your safe zone. A target is considered dangerous if it
         Vector
                                                                                   comes within this range.
         CPA graphic
                                                                             6.    Select the Time To Safe Zone menu item to specify the time
                                                                                   period of your safe zone. A target is considered dangerous if it
                                                                                   enters the safe zone within this time period.
                                      3   9
                                                                             7.    Select the Safe Zone Ring menu item to show or hide the safe
                                                                                   zone on the radar display.
                                                                   D9008_1
                                                                             Displaying vessel vectors (CPA graphics)

True mode                                                                    1. Position the cursor over the target.
                                                                             2. To display the CPA graphic for the target, press the CPA
With the display set in True mode, the vectors of your vessel and               GRAPHIC softkey until the ON option is selected.
the target are shown extended to their intersection point. The
CPA is shown as a line that is placed on your vessel's vector at             3. To hide the CPA graphic for the target, press the CPA GRAPHIC
the point of the CPA. The length and direction of the line indicates            softkey until the OFF option is selected.
the distance and bearing of the target at CPA. The text indicates            4. To display the CPA graphic automatically when you place the
CPA and TCPA. The text next to the target symbol indicates its true             cursor over any part of the MARPA symbol, select the AUTO
course and speed.                                                               option.
                                                                             5. Press the OK button.

152                                                                                                                              G-Series User reference
MARPA options                                                     Parameter                Descriptions                 Options
The MARPA options are accessible by pressing the TARGET           Time to Safe Zone        If a target enters your      · 3 min
TRACKING > MARPA & AIS OPTIONS softkeys.                                                   safe zone within this time
                                                                                           period, it is considered     · 6 min
 Parameter              Descriptions                 Options
                                                                                           dangerous.                   · 12 min
 Vector Length          The time period              · 0.5 min
                        specified for drawing                                                                           · 24 min
                        length of vectors.           · 1 min
                                                                  Safe Zone Ring           Controls whether the         · Visible
                                                     · 3 min                               safe zone ring is
                                                                                           displayed or hidden          · Hidden
                                                     · 6 min
                                                                                           on screen.
                                                     · 12 min
                                                     · 30 min    Using MARPA
                                                     · 60 min    Acquiring a MARPA target to track
 Target History         Plots a target's previous    · OFF       In   the radar application:
                        position at specified                    1.    Select the TARGET TRACKING softkey.
                        intervals. The four          · 0.5 min
                        most recent position                     2.    Move the cursor over the target to be acquired.
                                                     · 1 min
                        points are displayed.                    3.    Select the ACQUIRE TARGET softkey.
                        If True target vectors       · 3 min
                                                                 The "target being acquired" symbol is displayed. If the target is
                        are selected, the four       · 6 min     present for several scans, the radar locks-on to the target, and the
                        most recent vessel                       symbol changes to "safe target" status.
                        position points are also
                        displayed.                               Cancelling a MARPA target
 Own Vessel Safe Zone   The safe zone is a ring,     · 0.1 nm    Inthe radar application:
                        centred on your boat,                    1. Move the cursor over the relevant target.
                        within which a target is     · 0.2 nm
                        considered dangerous                     2. Press the CANCEL TARGET softkey.
                                                     · 0.5 nm
                        if it will enter this zone               3. Alternatively, display the MARPA target list by pressing the
                        within the Time to Safe      · 1.0 nm       TARGET TRACKING, then MARPA LIST softkeys.
                        Zone period (see below).     · 2.0 nm    4. Using the trackpad, select the relevant MARPA target from the
                                                                    list.
                                                                 5. Press the CANCEL TARGET softkey.

Using radar                                                                                                                         153
9.12 Radar setup menu options
The Radar Setup menu enables you to configure the performance and behaviour of your radar scanner.
 Function                     Description                                                                           Options
 Select Scanner               Select the radar scanner that you want to use.
 Scanner Setup                This menu item contains a sub-menu that enables you to adjust the settings for        Scanner Speed
                              the following functions:
                                                                                                                    · 24 RPM
                              · Scanner Speed -- this option is only available with scanners that support
                                multiple speeds.Two speeds are available -- 24 RPM and Auto. You must               · Auto
                                select the AUTO option if you want to use the 48 RPM scan speed.                    Tune Adjust
                              · Tune Adjust -- allows you to fine tune the radar scanner's receiver for             · AUTO
                                maximum returns on the display. Raymarine recommends that this function is
                                set to AUTO. If you set this function to MANUAL and adjust the setting shortly      · MANUAL
                                after powering up the radar scanner, you should adjust it again approximately
                                                                                                                    Sea Clutter Curve
                                10 minutes after powering up the scanner, as the required setting will change
                                after the magnetron has warmed up.                                                  · ADJUST CURVE (1 to 8)
                              · Sea Clutter Curve -- radar echoes from waves can make it difficult to detect        Parking Offset
                                real targets. These echoes are known as "sea clutter". Several factors can
                                affect the level of clutter you see, including the weather and sea conditions,      · 0 to 358 degrees, in two-degree
                                and the mounting height of the radar. The sea clutter curve setting adjusts the       increments.
                                radar's sensitivity to sea clutter. The steepest setting for the curve is 1, and
                                the most shallow setting is 8.                                                      Antenna Size

                              · Parking Offset (Digital only) -- this setting is only available when the radar is   · Radome
                                set to Off or Standby. The parking offset determines how the scanner is aligned     · 4' Array
                                to the pedestal. The default setting is 0 degrees, with the scanner aligning to
                                the pedastal, facing forwards.                                                      · 6' Array
                              · Antenna Size -- this is used to specify the size of your radar scanner.
 Range Rings                  Enables or disables Range Rings, which help you to determine distances and            · Off
                              ranges.
                                                                                                                    · On



154                                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
 Function                       Description                                                                             Options
 Color Palette (Digital only)   The color palette options enable you to customize the look of the radar display for     · Bold
                                different situations, as follows:
                                                                                                                        · Professional 1
                                · Bold -- uses high color gain, predominately red, to show weak targets more
                                                                                                                        · Professional 2
                                  intensely.
                                                                                                                        · Pathfinder
                                · Professional 1 -- high resolution palette that uses the full color range to display
                                  the information discovered by the scanner, just the strong returns are red.           · Night Vision
                                · Professional 2 -- high resolution palette, displays weaker targets in browns
                                  with more intense targets displayed in yellows.
                                · Pathfinder -- similar to the Pathfinder color palette.
                                · Night Vision -- green.
 EBL Reference                  The measurement point used for reference when measuring distances using                 · Mag/True
                                Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) and range rings in the chart application. The
                                options are Magnetic/True North, or Relative.                                           · Relative

 Timed Transmit                 Controls the radar's timed transmission power-save mode.                                · On
                                                                                                                        · Off
 Transmit Period                When ON, the scanner performs the number of scans specified and then shuts              · 10 SCANS
                                down for the number of minutes specified by the Standby Period setting.
                                                                                                                        · 20 SCANS
                                                                                                                        · 30 SCANS
 Standby Period                 Indicates the number of minutes that the system shuts down - the scanner does           · 3 MINS
                                not rotate and the display is in standby mode.
                                                                                                                        · 5 MINS
                                                                                                                        · 10 MINS
                                                                                                                        · 15 MINS
 Bearing Alignment              Enables you to make corrections for display azimuth error.                              Refer to Installation Guide
 Radar Advanced Setup           Advanced setup options.                                                                 Refer to Installation Guide


Using radar                                                                                                                                           155
156   G-Series User reference
Chapter 10: Using AIS

Chapter contents
·    10.1 AIS overview on page 158
·    10.2 AIS prerequisites on page 159
·    10.3 Classes of AIS data on page 160
·    10.4 Enabling AIS on page 161
·    10.5 Displaying AIS vectors on page 161
·    10.6 AIS status symbols on page 162
·    10.7 AIS silent mode on page 162
·    10.8 Viewing AIS target information on page 163
·    10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions on page 164
·    10.10 AIS options on page 165
·    10.11 AIS alarms on page 166
·    10.12 Buddy tracking on page 167
·    10.13 Aid to Navigation (AToN) targets on page 169
·    10.14 Land base station targets on page 170




Using AIS                                                 157
10.1 AIS overview                                                                 1. Heading.

The AIS feature enables you to receive information broadcast by                   2. Large vessel.
other vessels, and to add these vessels as targets in the chart and               3. Direction of turn.
radar applications.
                                                                                  4. Small vessel.
With an optional AIS unit connected to your system you can:
· Display targets for any other AIS-equipped vessels.                             5. Transmitting target.

· Display voyage information being broadcast by these targets,                    6. Safety-critical data.
  such as their position, course, speed and rate-of-turn.                         7. COG / SOG vector.
· Display basic or detailed information for each target vessel,                   8. Safe zone (defined by distance or time).
  including safety-critical target data.
                                                                                  9. Dangerous target (flashes).
· Set up a safe zone around your vessel.
· View AIS alarm and safety-related messages.                                     AIS-equipped vessels in the surrounding area are displayed in the
                                                                                  chart or radar application as triangular targets. Up to 100 targets
AIS information is displayed in the form of an overlay in the chart               are displayed. As the vessel's status changes, the symbol for the
and radar applications. Additional data is displayed in a dialog box              target changes accordingly.
in the chart application, for example:
                                                                                  Vectors can be displayed for each target. These vectors indicate
                                                                                  the direction of travel and rate of turn of the vessel and the distance
      1                                                                           it will travel over a specified period of time (COG / SOG vector).
      2                                                                           Targets displayed with their vectors are referred to as `active targets'
                                                                                  and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. The larger the
      3
                                                                                  vessel, the larger the target. You can either display all targets or
                                                                                  just dangerous targets.
      4
                                                                                  How AIS Works
                                                                                  AIS uses digital radio signals to broadcast `real-time' information
                       097°T
                       11.6 kt                                                    between vessels and shore-based stations via dedicated VHF radio
                     1.2 37n m                                                    frequencies. This information is used to identify and track vessels in
                   00h 04m 33s                                                    the surrounding area and to provide fast, automatic and accurate
      5                                                                           collision avoidance data. The AIS features complement the radar
                                                                                  application, as AIS can operate in radar blind spots and can detect
                                                                                  smaller vessels equipped with AIS.
                       6         7             8            9
                                                                       D11930_1




158                                                                                                                                  G-Series User reference
 Note: It may not be mandatory for vessels to be fitted with           10.2 AIS prerequisites
 operational AIS equipment. Therefore, you should not assume
 that your multifunction display will show ALL vessels in your area.   You must have suitable AIS hardware connected to your
 Due prudence and judgement should be exercised. AIS should            multifunction display to make use of the AIS functionality.
 be used to complement radar, NOT substitute it.                       In order to run AIS, you will need:

AIS Simulator Mode                                                     · A receive-only AIS unit or a full AIS transceiver (a unit that sends
                                                                         and receives).
Raymarine recommends that you use the simulator function to
familiarize yourself with the AIS features. When the simulator         · A VHF antenna - this is usually supplied with the AIS system.
function is enabled (Menu > System Setup > Simulator), it displays     · A GPS - to provide position data.
20 AIS targets within a 25 nm range. These targets are displayed
using the appropriate AIS target's status symbol, and move around      · The AIS layer enabled in the chart or radar application, as
the screen as if they were real targets.                                 appropriate.

 Note: Incoming safety messages are NOT displayed while the             Note: A receiver will allow you to receive data about other
 simulator is enabled.                                                  vessels in your area but will not allow other vessels to `see' you.
                                                                        A full transceiver transmits and receives AIS data, and therefore
                                                                        allows you to receive data about other vessels. It also enables
                                                                        other AIS-equipped vessels to see and receive information about
                                                                        your vessel. This could include position, course, speed and rate
                                                                        of turn data.

                                                                       When the AIS unit is connected to your multifunction display, the
                                                                       status of the unit is indicated by an AIS icon in the transducer data
                                                                       box.
                                                                       You can connect an AIS unit to your multifunction display using
                                                                       NMEA0183 or SeaTalkng, depending on the AIS unit. If connecting
                                                                       using NMEA0183, you will now need to specify the 38,400 baud
                                                                       setting (Menu > System Setup > System Integration > NMEA
                                                                       Port Setting) for the NMEA port that communicates with the AIS
                                                                       transceiver or receiver.




Using AIS                                                                                                                                 159
10.3 Classes of AIS data                                                                   Class A                          Class B
                                                                       Data                (receive)   Class B (send)       (receive)
There are 2 classes of AIS data; each class supports a different
range of AIS data.                                                     Antenna location
AIS data is defined as Class A or Class B. The sending and
receiving of Class A and Class B data may not be compulsory for all    Draft
vessels. Therefore, you should NOT assume that your multifunction
display is showing all vessels in your area.                           Cargo
                                                                       Information
 Note: Not all AIS units will decode all the available AIS
 information. For example, some AIS Class B receivers do not           Destination
 decode and output information such as the vessel's name, IMO
 number, vessel draft / beam / length, and destination. Additionally
 some Class A vessels do not input all of the required AIS data, in    ETA
 which case the information will not be shown on your multifunction
 display.                                                              Time
Your AIS receiver or transceiver may support additional AIS data
that is not shown on your multifunction display.                       Vessel's position
The following table lists the AIS information that is shown on your
multifunction display:                                                 COG
                   Class A                           Class B
 Data              (receive)       Class B (send)    (receive)         SOG

 Vessel's name
                                                                       Gyro heading

 Type
                                                                       Rate of turn

 Call sign
                                                                       Navigational
                                                                       status
 IMO number
                                                                       Safety message
 Length and beam


160                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
10.4 Enabling AIS                                         10.5 Displaying AIS vectors
                                                          You must have the correct data available before AIS vectors can
Enabling AIS in the chart application                     be displayed.
In the 2D chart view:                                     A target is defined as active when it has the following data displayed
1. Select the 2D CHART LAYERS softkey.                    graphically:
2. Use the AIS TARGETS softkey to select the ON option.   · A COG/SOG vector indicating the predicted distance that a target
                                                            will travel within a given period of time.
Enabling AIS in the radar application                     · A heading and direction of turn indicator.
In the radar application:
1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.                       Enabling and disabling AIS vectors
2. Use the AIS LAYER softkey to select the ON option.     In the chart or radar application:
                                                          1. Move the cursor over the relevant AIS target.
                                                          2. Press the AIS VECTOR softkey until the ON or OFF option is
                                                              selected, as appropriate.
                                                          3. Press the OK button.

                                                           Note: The same target vector and safe zone settings apply to
                                                           both radar MARPA and AIS targets.




Using AIS                                                                                                                   161
10.6 AIS status symbols                                                      10.7 AIS silent mode
AIS status is indicated by a symbol in the databar.                          AIS silent mode enables you to disable AIS transmissions
 Symbol                    Description                                       AIS silent mode enables you to disable the transmitting functions
                                                                             of your AIS equipment. This is useful when you do not want to
                           AIS unit is switched on and operating.            transmit your vessel's AIS data to other AIS receivers, but still wish
                                                                             to receive data from other vessels.

                                                                              Note: Not all AIS equipment supports silent mode. For more
                           AIS currently unavailable.                         information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your
                                                                              AIS unit.


                           AIS unit is switched off, or not connected.       Enabling and disabling AIS silent mode
                                                                             In   the chart or radar application:
                                                                             1.    Press the MENU button.
                           AIS unit is in Silent Mode.                       2.    Select the AIS Layer Setup menu item.
                                                                             3.    Select the ON or OFF option for the Silent Mode option, as
                                                                                   appropriate.
                           AIS unit is in Silent Mode, with active alarms.



                           AIS unit is connected and switched on, but has
                           active alarms.


                           AIS unit is connected and switched on, but the
                           dangerous and lost alarm is disabled.




162                                                                                                                            G-Series User reference
10.8 Viewing AIS target information                                        Target type                Description                  Symbol

You can display information relating to individual AIS targets.            Dangerous target           Targets within specified
                                                                                                      distance (CPA) or time
When a target is highlighted with the cursor, the softkeys change                                     (TCPA). Dangerous
to allow you to select the following options:                                                         target alarm sounds if
· AIS vectors.                                                                                        enabled. Target flashes.

· AIS safety critical data.                                                Uncertain target           Calculated CPA / TCPA
                                                                                                      value uncertain.
· AIS list.
                                                                           Lost target                When signal of
· Full AIS data.                                                                                      dangerous target not
                                                                                                      received for 20 seconds.
AIS target symbols                                                                                    Target in latest predicted
                                                                                                      position. Alarms sounds
Your multifunction display shows a range of symbols to represent                                      if enabled. Target
the different types of AIS target.                                                                    flashes.
 Target type             Description                Symbol                 Buddy target               Target has previously
 Transmitting target     Target not activated,                                                        been added to the Buddy
                         dangerous or lost.                                                           List.
                         Target is moving or at                            Aid To Navigation (AToN)   AToN target is ON
                         anchor.                                           target (Real)              position.
 Activated target        Target activated --        COG/SOG    Direction
                                                                           Aid To Navigation (AToN)   AToN target is OFF
                         that is, AIS vector        vector     of turn
                                                                           target (Real)              position.
                         displayed. Vector
                         line (optional) shows                 Heading     Aid To Navigation (AToN)   AToN target is ON
                         predicted distance                                target (Virtual)           position.
                         travelled within a given
                         time.                                             Aid To Navigation (AToN)   AtoN target is OFF
                                                                           target (Virtual)           position.
 Selected target         Target selected with
                         cursor. Can activate the                          Land base station target   Land base station target
                         target and view detailed                                                     is ONLINE.
                         data.                           AIS




Using AIS                                                                                                                                   163
Displaying detailed AIS target information                            10.9 Using AIS to avoid collisions
In the chart or radar application:                                    You can use the AIS safe zone and safety message functions to
1. In the chart application, select the AIS OPTIONS softkey (or       help you avoid collisions with other vessels and objects.
    RADAR AND AIS softkey if Radar Overlay is ON).
2. In the radar application, select the TARGET TRACKING softkey.      Safe Zones
3. Select the AIS LIST softkey.                                       A safe zone is a ring centred on your vessel within which a target
                                                                      is considered dangerous. It is displayed in the radar or chart
4. Select the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.                             applications as a red ring.
 Note: You can also display full AIS information by moving the        This AIS safe zone uses the same criteria as MARPA and will deem
 cursor over the relevant target in the chart or radar application,   a target dangerous if it comes within a specified distance of your
 and selecting the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.                        vessel (closest point of approach or CPA) within a specified time
                                                                      (time to closest point of approach or TCPA). The CPA and TCPA are
                                                                      calculated using COG/SOG and position from the AIS target.
                                                                      When your system recognizes a dangerous AIS target:
                                                                      · The target symbol changes to red and flashes.
                                                                      · An alarm pop-up is displayed (this can be disabled if required).
                                                                      · An alarm sounds (this can be disabled if required).

                                                                       Note: When the AIS receiver is connected and functioning, the
                                                                       system will check for dangerous targets within the safe zone
                                                                       and if enabled issue an alarm whenever necessary. Dangerous
                                                                       target alarm operates irrespective of the ON or OFF status of the
                                                                       AIS target display, or the VISIBLE / HIDDEN status of the safe
                                                                       zone ring.

                                                                      Safety Messages
                                                                      When the status of the AIS Safety Messages function is set to ON in
                                                                      the Menu > AIS Layer Setup Menu, any incoming safety messages
                                                                      from surrounding vessels, shore stations and mobile stations are
                                                                      displayed in a pop-up box. If known, the message will include the
                                                                      sending vessel's position in latitude / longitude. You will have the
                                                                      option to:
                                                                      · Remove the message (ACKNOWLEDGE).

164                                                                                                                    G-Series User reference
· Place a waypoint on your chart / radar to mark the sending           10.10 AIS options
  vessel's position.
                                                                       The AIS options are accessible in the chart application by pressing
· Select to GOTO the sending vessel's position.
                                                                       the AIS OPTIONS > MARPA & AIS OPTIONS softkeys, or the radar
 Note: You will NOT receive any safety messages in Simulator           application by pressing the TARGET TRACKING > MARPA & AIS
 mode (Menu > System Setup > Simulator).                               OPTIONS softkeys.
                                                                        Parameter             Description                 Options

Displaying safety-critical AIS information                              Vector Length         The time period             · 0.5 min
                                                                                              specified for drawing
In   the chart or radar application:                                                          length of vectors.          · 1 min
1.    Move the cursor over the relevant AIS target.                                                                       · 3 min
2.    Press the AIS DATA softkey until the ON option is highlighted.                                                      · 6 min
3.    Press the OK button.
                                                                                                                          · 12 min
                                                                                                                          · 30 min
                                                                                                                          · 60 min
                                                                        Target History        Plots a target's previous   · OFF
                                                                                              position at specified
                                                                                              intervals. The four         · 0.5 min
                                                                                              most recent position        · 1 min
                                                                                              points are displayed.
                                                                                              If True target vectors      · 3 min
                                                                                              are selected, the four      · 6 min
                                                                                              most recent vessel
                                                                                              position points are also
                                                                                              displayed.




Using AIS                                                                                                                              165
 Parameter              Description                  Options     10.11 AIS alarms
 Own Vessel Safe Zone   The safe zone is a ring,     · 0.1 nm    The AIS functions generate a number of alarms to alert you to
                        centred on your boat,                    dangerous or lost targets.
                        within which a target is     · 0.2 nm
                        considered dangerous                     In addition to the dangerous target alarm previously described, the
                                                     · 0.5 nm
                        if it will enter this zone               system generates an alarm when a dangerous target becomes a
                        within the Time to Safe      · 1.0 nm    lost target i.e. its signal has not been received for 20 seconds.
                        Zone period (see below).     · 2.0 nm    Your AIS receiver generates local alarms which are displayed and
                                                                 sounded on your multifunction display whenever an alarm condition
 Time to Safe Zone      If a target enters your      · 3 min     exists on the unit.
                        safe zone within this time
                        period, it is considered     · 6 min     Local AIS alarms
                        dangerous.                   · 12 min    When the connected AIS unit generates an alarm, your multifunction
                                                     · 24 min    display shows a local alarm message and indicates the alarm status
                                                                 in the data bar icon.
 Safe Zone Ring         Controls whether the         · Visible
                        safe zone ring is                        Active AIS alarms list
                        displayed or hidden          · Hidden
                                                                 The active alarm list shows the status of each local alarm. This list
                        on screen.                               can either be accessed via the Menu > AIS Layer Setup Menu, or
                                                                 from the Menu > Alarms Setup Menu.

                                                                  Note: When local AIS alarms are acknowledged, the target
                                                                  is shown as dangerous (flashing, with a red outline), and the
                                                                  active alarm status icon is displayed until the target is no longer
                                                                  dangerous.


                                                                 Acknowledging AIS alarms
                                                                 In the chart or radar application:
                                                                 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey.

                                                                  Note: An AIS alarm remains active until it is acknowledged on
                                                                  your multifunction display.



166                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
10.12 Buddy tracking                                                   How it works
                                                                       When the AIS Layer is enabled in the chart or radar application, AIS
You can configure your display to notify you when an AIS-equipped      targets are shown on your display. You can add any AIS target to
friend or "buddy" comes within range of your vessel.                   a "Buddy List", each entry consisting of an MMSI number, and an
The Buddy Tracking feature enables you to add AIS-equipped             optional name. Subsequently, whenever Buddy Tracking is enabled
friends and regular contacts to a "Buddy List" on your multifunction   on your mutlifunction display, and a "Buddy" vessel with an MMSI
display. As soon as a vessel on your Buddy List sails into the range   number sails into the range of your AIS receiver, an AIS Buddy icon
of your AIS receiver, the vessel icon changes to indicate this.        is displayed. Up to 100 vessels may be added to the Buddy List.

            2            1                                             Pre-requisites
                                                                       The following items are required for the Buddy Tracking feature:
                                                                       · For the purposes of using the Buddy Tracking feature, it is
                                                                         assumed that your display is already connected to a suitable
                                                                         AIS receiver.
                                                                       · Only AIS-equipped vessels will be detected.

                                                                       Enabling and disabling buddy tracking
                                                                       In the chart or radar application, with the AIS Targets layer enabled:
                                                                       1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                       2. Select AIS Layer Setup.
                                                                       3. Use the Buddy Tracking menu item to select the ON or OFF
                                                                           option, as appropriate.
            3
                                                                       Adding a vessel to your buddy list
 Item                              Description                         In the chart or radar application:
 1                                 Buddy icon                          1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over an AIS target.
                                                                           The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
 2                                 Dangerous target icon
                                                                           options.
 3                                 Normal AIS icon                     2. Press the ADD TO BUDDY LIST softkey.
                                                                       The MMSI and vessel name are automatically added to the Buddy
                                                                       List.

Using AIS                                                                                                                                 167
Adding a vessel to your buddy list from AIS                          Editing a buddy's details
target list                                                          1. In the chart or radar application, use the trackpad to move the
                                                                        cursor over an AIS target.
1. If you are in the chart application, press the AIS OPTIONS
   softkey.                                                             The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
                                                                        options.
2. If you are in the radar application, press the TARGET
   TRACKING softkey.                                                 2. Alternatively, press the MENU button, and select the AIS Layer
                                                                        Setup menu.
3. Press the AIS LIST softkey.
                                                                     3. Press the VIEW BUDDY LIST softkey.
   The AIS Target List is displayed.
                                                                        The AIS Buddy List dialog is displayed.
4. Using the trackpad, select the AIS target that you want to add    4. Press the EDIT VESSEL DETAILS softkey.
   to your Buddy List.
                                                                        The Edit Buddy Vessel dialog is displayed.
5. Press the ADD TO BUDDY LIST softkey.
                                                                     5. In the MMSI field, edit the MMSI number (nine digits) if required.
6. Press the OK button.
                                                                     6. (Optionally) In the NAME field, edit the existing name, or enter a
                                                                        new name. This could be the name of the vessel, or the name of
Adding a vessel to your buddy list from main                            the friend who owns the vessel, for example.
menu                                                                 7. Press the OK button.
Inthe chart or radar application:
1. Press the MENU button.                                            Deleting a buddy
2. Using the trackpad, select the AIS LAYER SETUP menu item.         1. In the chart or radar application, use the trackpad to move the
                                                                        cursor over an AIS target.
3. Using the trackpad, select the VIEW BUDDY LIST menu item.
                                                                        The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related
4. Press the ADD VESSEL softkey.                                        options.
5. In the MMSI field, enter a valid MMSI number (nine digits).       2. Alternatively, press the MENU button, and select the AIS Layer
6. Press the OK button.                                                 Setup menu.
7. In the NAME field, use the trackpad to enter a name. This could   3. Press the VIEW BUDDY LIST softkey.
   be the name of the vessel, or the name of the friend that owns       The AIS Buddy List dialog is displayed.
   the vessel, for example.                                          4. Using the trackpad, highlight the Buddy that you want to delete.
8. Press the OK button.                                              5. Press the DELETE VESSEL softkey.
                                                                        A dialog is displayed, asking you to confirm the deletion.
                                                                     6. Select YES to confirm that you wish to delete the buddy, or NO
                                                                        to abort.
                                                                     7. Press the OK button.

168                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
Displaying additional buddy information                              10.13 Aid to Navigation (AToN) targets
In the chart or radar application:                                   With an AIS unit connected by NMEA 0183 your system can display
1. Using the trackpad, move the cursor over an AIS target.           Aid to Navigation (AToN) targets.
    The softkeys change to reflect this and give you Buddy-related   AToN targets represent shore-based or mobile stations that have
    options.                                                         been equipped with AIS technology. They broadcast information
                                                                     such as their location, approximately every 3 minutes.
2. Press the BUDDY DATA AUTO ON OFF softkey.
                                                                     These stations may also be programmed to provide other navigation
3. Select theON option.                                              safety information, for example, meteorological and hydrological
    The Buddy's details are displayed.                               data. However, not all information broadcast by AToN targets is
4. Press the OK button.                                              currently supported by your multifunction display.
                                                                     The following AToN target information is supported by your
                                                                     multifunction display, and will be shown in the chart or radar
                                                                     applications when you position the cursor over an AToN target and
                                                                     press the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey:
                                                                     · Name.
                                                                     · Type.
                                                                     · Position.
                                                                     · Status.
                                                                     · Off / On position.
                                                                     · MMSI.
                                                                     · Dimensions.
                                                                     · CPA.
                                                                     · TCPA.
                                                                     · Last seen.
                                                                     AToN targets are shown in the radar and chart applications as:
                                                                      Icon           Description
                                                                                     Aid To Navigation real target: ON position.

                                                                                     Aid To Navigation real target: OFF position.


Using AIS                                                                                                                             169
 Icon          Description                                          10.14 Land base station targets
               Aid To Navigation virtual target: ON position.       With an AIS unit connected by NMEA 0183 or SeaTalkng your
                                                                    system can display land base station targets.
               Aid To Navigation virtual target: OFF position.      Land base station targets represent shore-based stations that have
                                                                    been equipped with AIS technology. They broadcast information
                                                                    such as their location, approximately every 10 seconds.
Standard AIS symbols are used to indicate whether the target is     These stations may also be programmed to provide other navigation
dangerous, lost, or selected.                                       safety information, for example, meteorological and hydrological
                                                                    data. However, not all information broadcast by land base station
 Note: You can NOT display vectors for an AToN target (activate).   targets is currently supported by your multifunction display.
                                                                    The following land base station target information is supported by
 Note: You can NOT add an AToN target to the Buddy List.            your multifunction display, and will be shown in the chart or radar
                                                                    applications when you position the cursor over a land base station
                                                                    target and press the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey:
Displaying AIS data for AToN targets
                                                                    · Name.
In the chart or radar application, with the AIS layer enabled:
                                                                    · Type.
1. Move the cursor over the relevant Aid To Navigation (AToN)
    target.                                                         · Position.
    The softkeys change to show the AToN options.                   · Status.
2. Select the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.                           · Off / On position.
                                                                    · MMSI.
                                                                    · Dimensions.
                                                                    · CPA.
                                                                    · TCPA.
                                                                    · Last seen.
                                                                    In the chart and radar applications land base station targets are
                                                                    shown as:
                                                                     Icon           Description
                                                                                    Land base station target: ONLINE.


170                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
Standard AIS symbols are used to indicate whether the target is
dangerous, lost, or selected.

 Note: You can NOT display vectors for land base station targets
 (activate).

 Note: You can NOT add land base station targets to the Buddy
 List.


Displaying AIS data for land base station
targets
In the chart or radar application, with the AIS layer enabled:
1. Move the cursor over the relevant land base station target.
    The softkeys change to show the options.
2. Select the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey.




Using AIS                                                          171
172   G-Series User reference
Chapter 11: Using the Course Deviation Indicator

Chapter contents
·    11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview on page 174
·    11.2 Displaying the CDI application on page 175
·    11.3 Using the CDI application on page 175




Using the Course Deviation Indicator                        173
11.1 Course Deviation Indicator overview                                  Screen item   Description

The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) gives a graphical                    1             Starboard steer arrow
representation of your vessel's course in a `rolling road' format.        2             Water
With your display receiving accurate heading and position
information, you can use the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) to          3             Horizon
monitor your course and accurately steer to a target waypoint.            4             Maximum Cross-Track Error (XTE) value
The CDI application shows a `rolling road', which represents a width
                                                                          5             Port line
of sea equal to the Cross Track Error (XTE) limits that you have
specified in the Setup menu. As you travel towards the target             6             Vessel icon
waypoint, the checkered pattern and the waypoint will move down
the screen at a rate proportional to your boat's speed. Navigation        7             Steer instruction
data is displayed alongside or below the rolling road.
                                                                          8             Center line
The CDI application is pre-configured to display the CDI graphic.
You can customize the panel to display any available data.                9             Cross-Track Error (XTE) value
                                                                          10            Destination name
      1   2     3           5   6   8       11                       12
                                                                          11            Starboard line
                                                                          12            Port steer arrow




                        4       7       9   10



174                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
11.2 Displaying the CDI application                                11.3 Using the CDI application
With the home screen displayed:
                                                                   Monitoring Your Course Using CDI
1. Select a page that includes the CDI application.
                                                                   You can use the `rolling road' format of the Course Deviation
   The CDI application is displayed.                               Indicator (CDI) application to monitor your course.
 Note: If the CDI application is placed in multiple windows, the   The steering instructions below the rolling road tell you what
 same data is displayed in each.                                   correction is needed to maintain your course and arrive at the target
                                                                   waypoint.
                                                                   The following table explains these instructions.
                                                                    Instruction         Cause
                                                                    STEER               XTE error to port is more than a 1/4 of the maximum
                                                                    STARBOARD           XTE error limit in the Setup menu.
                                                                    STEER PORT          XTE error to starboard is more than a 1/4 of the
                                                                                        maximum XTE error limit in the Setup menu

                                                                   Indication arrows are placed either side of the steering instruction,
                                                                   pointing towards the centre line. The greater the error the more
                                                                   arrows appear. You should correct your course by steering in the
                                                                   direction indicated by the arrows.

                                                                   Following a route using the CDI application
                                                                   1. In the CDI application, press the GOTO softkey.
                                                                   2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                      The Route List is displayed.
                                                                   3. Using the trackpad, select the route that you want to follow.
                                                                   4. Press the OK button.

                                                                   Going to a waypoint using the CDI application
                                                                   1. In the CDI application, press the GOTO softkey.
                                                                   2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                      The Waypoint List is displayed.
Using the Course Deviation Indicator                                                                                                          175
3. Using the trackpad, select the waypoint that you want to go to.
4. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey.

 Note: Press the STOP GOTO softkey at any time to stop going
 towards the waypoint.

 Note: If you have sailed off course while heading to a waypoint,
 you can press the RESTART XTE button at any time to restart
 Cross Track Error.


Changing the data displayed in the CDI
application
In   the CDI application:
1.    Press the MENU button.
2.    Select the Panel Setup Menu menu item.
3.    Select the Configure: CDI menu item.
      A red outline appears around the main screen element in the
      CDI display.
4.    Highlight the data element that you want to change.
5.    Select the SELECT DATA softkey.
6.    Select the appropriate data group.
7.    Highlight the data item that you want, then select the appropriate
      option.
8.    Press the OK button.
The CDI display will be updated to show the data that you specified.




176                                                                        G-Series User reference
Chapter 12: Using the fishfinder

Chapter contents
·    12.1 Fishfinder introduction on page 178
·    12.2 The sonar image on page 179
·    12.3 Fishfinder presets on page 181
·    12.4 Fishfinder display modes on page 182
·    12.5 Fishfinder range on page 185
·    12.6 Fishfinder presentation options on page 186
·    12.7 Fishfinder waypoints on page 191
·    12.8 Fishfinder alarms on page 191
·    12.9 Fishfinder setup on page 192




Using the fishfinder                                    177
12.1 Fishfinder introduction                                          Fishfinder screen
                                                                      The fishfinder displays a scrolling image of the seabed, updating
            Warning: Sonar operation                                  from the right as your vessel makes progress.
            · NEVER operate the sounder with the boat out of          Example fishfinder screen
              the water.
            · NEVER touch the transducer face when the sounder
              is powered on.
            · SWITCH OFF the sounder if divers are likely to be
              within 7.6 m (25 ft) of the transducer.


Fishfinder overview
The fishfinder application provides a detailed view of the fish and
seabed under your vessel, enabling you to accurately distinguish
between different sizes of fish, bottom structure, and underwater
obstacles. The standard fishfinder image is a historical, scrolling
bottom graph with range and sonar frequency automatically selected
by the system.
The various functions and features of the fishfinder application      The fishfinder window includes the following aspects:
include:
                                                                      · The bottom together with any bottom structure such as reefs and
· Preset modes for easy optimal operation.                              shipwrecks etc.
· Display modes (Zoom, A-Scope or Bottom Lock).                       · Target images indicating fish.
                                                                      · A status bar noting the frequency and gain settings.
· Adjustable range and zoom.
                                                                      · The bottom depth.
· Finding bottom feeding fish with the bottom lock display mode.
                                                                      Status icon
· Clutter and gain options to simplify the image.
                                                                      The fishfinder status icon is located in the top-right section of the
· Pausing and adjusting the speed of the scrolling image.             screen:
· Using waypoints to mark a position.
· Determining depths and distances of targets.
· Fishfinder alarms (fish, depth or water temperature).               · Icon animated - fishfinder is operating.

178                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
· Icon static - the fishfinder transducer is connected but not            12.2 The sonar image
  transmitting.
· Icon greyed-out - no fishfinder transducer is connected.                Interpreting the seabed using sonar
                                                                          It is important to understand how to correctly interpret the seabed
How the fishfinder works                                                  structure represented in the fishfinder display.
The fishfinder application uses a Digital Sounder Module (DSM) and        The seabed usually produces a strong echo.
a suitable sonar transducer. The DSM interprets signals from the          The following images show how different seabed conditions are
transducer and builds up a detailed underwater view.                      represented in the sonar display:
The transducer is located on the bottom of the boat, it sends pulses       A hard bottom (sand) produces a thin line
of sound waves into the water and measures the time it takes for the
sound wave to travel to the bottom and back. The returning echoes
are affected by bottom structure and by any other objects in their
path, for example reefs, wrecks, shoals or fish.                           A soft bottom (mud or seaweed cover) produces a wide line
                                                                                                                                 .
                                                                           The dark layer indicates a strong signal.
Colors are used on the display to indicate the strength of the returns.
You can use this information to determine the bottom structure,
the size of fish and other objects in the water, such as debris or
air bubbles
                                                                           A rocky or uneven bottom or a wreck produces an irregular
 Note: Some transducers include additional sensors to measure              image with peaks and troughs
 water temperature and/or speed.




                                                                                                                                           D6855-2
                                                                          The dark layers indicate a good echo; the lighter areas indicate
                                                                          weaker echoes. This could mean that the upper layer is soft and
                                                                          therefore allowing sound waves to pass to the more solid layer
                                                                          below.
                                                                          It is also possible that the sound waves are making two complete
                                                                          trips ­ hitting the seabed, bouncing off the vessel, then reflecting
                                                                          off the seabed again. This can happen if the water is shallow, the
                                                                          seabed is hard, or the gain is set high.
Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                                 179
Factors influencing the sonar display                                    Water depth
The quality and accuracy of the display can be influenced by a           As sea depth increases signal strength decreases, resulting in a
number of factors including vessel speed, depth, object size,            lighter on-screen image of the bottom.
background noise and transducer frequency.
                                                                         Size of the target
Vessel speed                                                             The larger the target, the larger the return on the fishfinder display.
The shape of the target changes along with your speed. Slower            The size of a fish target is also dependent upon the size of the fish's
speeds return flatter, more horizontal marks. Higher speeds cause        swim bladder rather than its overall size. The swim bladder varies in
the target to thicken and arch slightly, until at fast speeds the mark   size between different breeds of fish.
resembles a double vertical line.
                                                                         Transducer frequency
Target depth                                                             The same target will appear differently when the transducer
The closer the target to the surface, the larger the mark on screen.     frequency is changed. The lower the frequency the broader the
                                                                         mark.
 Note: The depth of individual targets can be displayed by
 switching on the Target Depth ID in the fishfinder setup menu.          Clutter / Background noise
 The number of target depths displayed is influenced by the fish         The fishfinder picture may be impaired by echoes received from
 alarm sensitivity level.                                                floating or submerged debris, air bubbles or even the boats
                                                                         movement. This is known as `background noise' or `clutter' and is
                                                                         controlled by the gain modes. The system will automatically control
                                                                         the gain settings according to the depth and water conditions. You
                                                                         can however adjust the gain settings manually if you prefer.




180                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
12.3 Fishfinder presets                                                 1. Press the appropriate softkey to select from:

The fishfinder provides you with four preset configurations available      · PRESET 1 SINGLE,
on the fishfinder toolbar. These enable you to quickly select              · PRESET 2 DUAL,
appropriate settings tailored for various situations.
                                                                           · PRESET 3 SHALLOW or
Each preset has been configured to provide the best operating
parameters for the fishfinder. However, it is possible to manually         · PRESET 4 DEEP
adjust the presets if necessary. The four presets are:
                                                                        After a few moments, the fishfinder display will change to the new
· Single -- this preset provides quick access to a single-frequency     mode. This is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the status bar.
  configuration, suitable for general fishing conditions.
· Dual -- this preset provides a dual frequency configuration.
  You can either display two different frequencies at the same
  time in one window, or display one frequency at full-screen on
  your master display and the other frequency at full-screen on an
  additional networked display.
· Shallow -- this preset optimizes the fishfinder display for shallow
  waters.
· Deep -- this preset optimizes the fishfinder display for deep
  waters.
Display modes
When using presets, you can either select the relevant preset and
start using the default configuration immediately, or you can adjust
the preset to your needs using the display modes:
· Zoom
· Bottom Lock
· A-Scope
Any changes you make to a preset are retained when you switch
off the power to your multifunction display.

Selecting a fishfinder preset
From the fishfinder main screen:
Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                       181
12.4 Fishfinder display modes                                         When the range increases, the area shown in the zoom window
                                                                      also increases.
Selecting a fishfinder display mode                                   Zoom split
When a fishfinder preset is selected, its softkey label changes to    With the zoom display mode you can split the screen and display
ADJUST. Pressing this softkey allows you to configure the display     the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image (ZOOM
mode settings to suit your requirements. (Changes to the display      SPLIT). The zoomed section is indicated on the standard fishfinder
mode are saved with the preset at power-off.)                         screen by a zoom box.
From the fishfinder main screen:
1. Use the softkeys to select an appropriate preset.
   The softkey name changes to ADJUST...
2. Select the ADJUST... softkey.
3. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
   which frequency display you wish to change.
4. Select the SELECT VIEW softkey.
5. Select the required display mode:
      · None,
      · Zoom,
      · Bottom Lock or
      · A-Scope.

Fishfinder zoom mode                                                  Enabling fishfinder zoom mode
The zoom display mode magnifies a region of the fishfinder screen     From the fishfinder main screen:
to display more detail.
                                                                      1. Use the softkeys to select an appropriate preset.
This zoom option enables you to:
                                                                         The softkey name changes to ADJUST...
· Replace the standard fishfinder image with the zoomed image,
                                                                      2. Select the ADJUST... softkey.
  or display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder
  image.                                                              3. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
                                                                         which frequency display you wish to change.
· Set the zoom factor to a predefined level, or adjust it manually.
                                                                      4. Select the SELECT VIEW softkey.
· Reposition the zoomed portion of the image to a different point     5. Select the ZOOM option.
  in the display.

182                                                                                                                  G-Series User reference
Selecting zoom split screen
With the fishfinder in zoom mode:
1. Press the ZOOM softkey to select FULL or SPLIT as required.
Adjusting the fishfinder zoom factor
When the zoom function is active (ZOOM FULL or ZOOM SPLIT),
you can either select a predefined zoom factor or adjust it manually.
With the fishfinder in zoom mode:
1. Press the ZOOM FACTOR softkey to toggle between predefined
   settings or select xR to set a factor manually. For manual
   settings, adjust the zoom factor with the trackpad.
2. Press the OK button.
Adjusting the position of the fishfinder zoomed area
When the zoom function is selected, the system automatically
selects the zoom position so that the bottom details are always in the
lower half of the display. If required you can reposition the portion of
the image to be zoomed so that an alternative area is displayed.
With the fishfinder in zoom mode:
1. Press the ZOOM POSITION softkey until the MAN option is
   selected.                                                                                                                    MODE 3
                                                                                                                                The A-scope
2. Use the rotary control to reposition the zoomed area as required.                                      MODE 2
                                                                                                                                image angles
                                                                                                          The left-hand side
3. Press the OK button.                                                               MODE 1              of the Mode 1         outward as
                                                                                      The A-scope         image is expanded     signal width
                                                                                      image is centred    to give a more        increases with
Fishfinder A-Scope mode                                                               in the window.      detailed view.        depth.

The A-Scope mode enables you to view a live (rather than historical)
image of the seabed and fish directly below your vessel.                   Enabling the Fishfinder A-Scope Mode
The standard fishfinder display shows a historical record of fishfinder    From the fishfinder main screen:
echoes. If required, you can display a live image of the bottom            1. Use the softkeys to select an appropriate preset.
structure and the fish directly below the transducer by using the
A-Scope feature. The width of the bottom covered by the A-Scope               The softkey name changes to ADJUST...
is indicated at the bottom of the window. A-Scope provides a more          2. Select the ADJUST... softkey.
precise and easier to interpret indication of the target strength.         3. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
There are three A-Scope modes, as illustrated in the diagram below:           which frequency display you wish to change.
Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                      183
4. Select the SELECT VIEW softkey.                                        Bottom Lock is selected for individual fishfinder windows and can
5. Select the A-SCOPE option.                                             either replace (ON) or appear alongside (SPLIT) the standard
                                                                          fishfinder image.
 Note: Enabling A-Scope mode automatically switches OFF
 Bottom Lock and Zoom.                                                    Enabling Bottom Lock
                                                                          From the fishfinder main screen:
                                                                          1. Use the softkeys to select an appropriate preset.
Bottom Lock
                                                                             The softkey name changes to ADJUST...
The Bottom Lock function applies a filter to flatten the image of the     2. Select the ADJUST... softkey.
seabed and make any objects on or just above it easier to discern.
This feature is particularly useful for finding fish that feed close to   3. With dual frequency screens select FREQ1 or FREQ2 to select
the bottom.                                                                  which frequency display you wish to change.
Bottom Lock is selected for individual fishfinder windows and             4. Select the SELECT VIEW softkey.
can replace or appear alongside the standard fishfinder image.            5. Select the BOTTOM LOCK option.
Adjusting the range of the bottom lock image allows you to view
more bottom details. You can also reposition the image on screen to       Adjusting the bottom lock range/position
anywhere between the bottom of the window (0%) and the middle of          With the fishfinder in bottom lock mode:
the window (50%) by using the Bottom Shift control.
                                                                          1. Use the appropriate softkeys and the trackpad to set Full /
                                                                             Split screen, Bottom lock range and Bottom shift values as
                                                                             appropriate.




184                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
12.5 Fishfinder range
The Range and Range Shift functions enable you to change the
range of depth displayed by the fishfinder.

Range
The Range function enables you to define the range of depth that
you see in the fishfinder display.
By default, the fishfinder display shows the shallowest required
range, enabling you to clearly see what is near the surface of the
water under your vessel. This is useful for finding smaller fish that
feed nearer the surface. An example of this kind of depth range is 0
to 200 feet. In this case, the range is 200 feet, so 200 feet of water
will be displayed on-screen at any one time.
There may be circumstances in which you want to see a less
detailed image showing a greater amount of depth beneath your
vessel. This is useful for locating bigger fish and other objects        Changing the fishfinder depth range
located closer to the seabed such as wrecks. An example of this          You can choose from either:
kind of depth range is 0 to 1000 feet or greater. In this case, the
range is 1000 feet, and you will be able to see 1000 feet of water       · an automatic adjustment whereby the display automatically show
beneath your vessel, without needing to scroll the display up or           the shallowest required range.
down.
                                                                         · manual adjustment of the depth range, up to the maximum depth
Range Shift                                                                displayed on the scrolling bottom and A-Scope images.
The Range Shift function enables you to define which area of the         Changes to the range affect all fishfinder windows.
overall depth you want to be able to see on-screen. For example,         1. Press the RANGE button.
if your range is 5000 feet and the display is showing the surface
                                                                         2. Toggle to AUTO or MAN using the RANGE softkey.
(0 feet) at the very top of the display, and 5000 feet at the bottom
of the display, you can use the Range Shift function to focus on a       3. Use the rotary controller to adjust the depth range.
different 5000 feet range. For example, 2000 feet at the very top of     4. Press OK.
the screen, and 7000 feet at the very bottom of the screen.
Example screen with range and range shift used to view the seabed
at a depth range of 40­80 ft



Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                  185
Using fishfinder range shift                                            12.6 Fishfinder presentation options
The DSM automatically adjusts the display to keep the bottom in         The PRESENTATION softkey gives you access to a features
the lower half of the display window. Alternatively you can shift the   and functions which enhance the fishfinder display and provide
image within the current range. Changes to the range shift are          additional on-screen functionality.
reflected in all fishfinder windows.
                                                                        Presentation options include:
1. Press the RANGE control to open the range toolbar.
2. Press the RANGE softkey repeatedly until the MAN option is           · Gain settings to enhance display clarity.
    selected.                                                           · Power to the transducer.
3. Press the RANGE SHIFT softkey.                                       · VRM features for measuring depth distance.
4. Select your desired setting using the trackpad.
                                                                        · Dual frequency view options.
5. Press OK.
                                                                        · Scroll pause and resume.

                                                                        Sonar gain
                                                                        The gain settings alter the way the DSM processes background
                                                                        noise (also called clutter). Adjusting the gain settings can improve
                                                                        the sonar image, however for optimum performance in most
                                                                        conditions, we recommend that you use the auto settings.
                                                                        The gain adjusts the return threshold (echo strength) above which
                                                                        the fishfinder will show an object on the screen.
                                                                        There are two gain modes:
                                                                        · Auto
                                                                        · Manual
                                                                        Auto
                                                                        In Auto mode, the DSM sonar automatically adjusts the gain setting
                                                                        to suit current conditions. Any adjustments made apply to all
                                                                        fishfinder windows using that particular frequency.
                                                                        There are three Auto modes, each suited to different scenarios:
                                                                        · Low (Cruising) is ideal for viewing fishfinder images with a
                                                                          minimum of background noise as you are cruising to your fishing
                                                                          spot. Only the strongest echoes are displayed.

186                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
· Medium (Trolling) is a slightly higher gain setting that displays   Fishfinder color gain
  more detail. This is the default mode.
                                                                      You can adjust the color gain to change the signal strength threshold
· High (Fishing) provides the most detail, but also displays the      for the strongest color in your fishfinder display.
  most background noise and surface clutter.
                                                                      Color gain sets the lower limit for the strongest echo color. All
                                                                      echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the
Manual                                                                strongest color. Those with a weaker value are divided equally
If necessary you can set the gain controls manually, between a        between the remaining colors.
value of 1 to 100 (default value is 75). This value should be set
high enough to see fish and bottom detail but without too much        · Setting a low value produces wide band for the weakest color, but
background noise. Generally a high gain is used in deep and/or          a small signal band for the other colors.
clear water; a low gain in shallow and/or murky water.                · Setting a high value gives a wide band for the strongest color, but
The new values remain set even when you switch off the display,         a small signal band for the other colors.
they are applied to both the active window and any other fishfinder
windows with the same frequency.                                      There are two color gain modes:

Selecting automatic fishfinder gain                                   · Auto. In Auto mode the color gain setting is automatically
                                                                        adjusted to suit current conditions. Any adjustments made apply
From the main fishfinder screen:                                        to all fishfinder windows.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                      · Manual. You can set the color gain manually, between a value
2. Press the GAIN softkey.
                                                                        of 1 to 100.
3. Press the GAIN softkey until the AUTO option is selected.
4. Use the trackpad to select the auto mode you want.                 Adjusting the fishfinder color gain
5. Press the OK button.                                               From the main fishfinder screen:
Adjusting the fishfinder gain manually                                1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
From the main fishfinder screen:                                      2. Press the GAIN softkey.
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.                                    3. Press the COLOR GAIN softkey until the MAN option is selected.
2. Press the GAIN softkey.                                            4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of color gain you
3. Press the GAIN softkey until the MAN option is selected.              want.
4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of gain you want,      5. Press the OK button.
   between a value of 1 to 100. (The default value is 75).            The new values remain set even when you switch off the display
5. Press the OK button.                                               and are applied to all fishfinder windows.
The new values remain set even when you switch off the display,
they are applied to both the active window and any other fishfinder
windows displaying the same frequency.
Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                    187
Fishfinder color threshold                                               4. Use the rotary control to select the amount of Time Varied Gain
                                                                            you want.
The color threshold setting determines the range of colors used on
screen. The effect of this is to set a color threshold below which       5. Press the OK button.
targets are not shown. For example a low setting would result in
only the strongest (orange and red) targets being displayed.             Fishfinder power
Adjusting the fishfinder color threshold                                 The power setting controls the power level of the transducer.
From the main fishfinder screen:                                         Power options:
1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                         · Auto. This is the default setting. When it is selected the DSM
2. Press the GAIN softkey.                                                 automatically determines the required power setting based on the
3. Press the COLOR THRESHOLD softkey.                                      current depth, speed, and (bottom) signal strength. .
4. Use the rotary controller to select the required color threshold.     · Manual. If you wish to manually adjust the power to suit current
5. Press the OK button.                                                    conditions, you can adjust the power level between 0% and
                                                                           100%, in 10% increments. Lower power levels are normally used
                                                                           in depth ranges less than 8 ft. (2.4 m) and higher power levels are
Fishfinder TVG (Time Varied Gain)                                          typically selected for depths greater than 12 ft. (3.7 m).
The Time Varied Gain (TVG) function reduces the amount of clutter
in the fishfinder display by varying the gain throughout the column of   Adjusting the fishfinder power
water. This function is useful for reducing the appearance of `noise'.   From the main fishfinder screen:
· Increasing the TVG value increases the maximum depth to which          1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
  TVG is applied. A high value decreases the gain in shallow water       2. Press the POWER softkey until the MAN option is selected.
  so that only the strongest echoes are displayed.
                                                                         3. Use the rotary control to select the amount of power you want.
· Decreasing the TVG value reduces the maximum depth. A low
                                                                         4. Press the OK button.
  TVG value has little effect on gain in shallow water.
                                                                         The new values remain set even when you switch off the display
TVG adjustment can be made automatically or manually.                    and are applied to all fishfinder windows.
Adjusting the fishfinder time varied gain
                                                                         Depth and distance with the fishfinder
 Note: TVG has no effect in fishfinder simulator mode.
                                                                         You can use VRM markers and depth lines to help you determine
1. From the main fishfinder screen, press the PRESENTATION               depths and distances in the fishfinder display.
   softkey.
                                                                         The fishfinder display provides a number of features to help you
2. Press the GAIN softkey.                                               determine depths and distances. These features are illustrated and
3. Press the TVG softkey until the MAN option is selected.               described in more detail below:

188                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
                                                                                        Screen item         Description
     1          2      3            4                          5                 6
                                                                                        4                   Depth Target ID -- depths are displayed against
                                                                                                            recognized targets. The sensitivity of these IDs is
                                                                                                            directly linked to the Fish Alarm sensitivity; the greater
                                                                                                            the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of
                                                                                                            labelled returns. These targets are switched on or off
                                                                                                            using the Fishfinder Display Setup menu.
                                                                                        5                   Vertical VRM marker -- indicates the distance behind
                                                                                                            your vessel.
                                                                                        6                   Depth markers -- these numbers indicate the depth.

                                                                                       Measuring depth and distance with VRM
                                                                                       You can use a Variable Range Marker (VRM) to determine an
                                                                                       object's depth and distance behind your vessel. These markers
                                                                                       consist of a horizontal (depth) line and a vertical (distance) line,
                                                                                       each of which are marked with the appropriate measurement and
                                                                                       are controlled individually.
                                                                                       From the main fishfinder screen:
 Screen item               Description                                                 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
 1                         Depth reading -- your current depth displayed. The          2. Press the SCROLL softkey to pause the display. This may make
                           size and position of this digit can be changed, using          it easier to position the VRM over the desired object.
                           the Fishfinder Display Setup menu.                          3. Press the VRM softkey to open the VRM toolbar.
                                                                                       4. Press the VRM softkey again until the ON option is selected.
 2                         Depth lines -- horizontal dashed lines drawn at
                           regular intervals to indicate the depth from the surface.   5. Measure the depth or distance:
                           These lines can be switched on or off using the                  · Press the VRM RANGE softkey to measure distance, or
                           Fishfinder Display Setup menu.                                   · Press the VRM DEPTH softkey to measure depth.
 3                         Horizontal VRM marker -- indicates the depth of a           6. Use the rotary control or touchscreen to measure the distance
                           target.                                                        or depth to your target.
                                                                                       7. Press the OK button to save the position.
                                                                                        Note: The VRMs used in the fishfinder application are unrelated
                                                                                        to the VRMs used in the radar application.

Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                                                189
Fishfinder scrolling                                                   4. Use the rotary control to adjust the scroll speed to the required
                                                                          value.
The fishfinder image scrolls from right to left. You can adjust or
pause the scrolling, for example to ease placing of waypoints or       Pausing the fishfinder scrolling image
VRMs on-screen.
                                                                       From the main fishfinder screen:
Scroll speed                                                           1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey.
You can adjust the speed at which the fishfinder image scrolls. A      2. Press the SCROLL softkey to pause the display.
faster speed provides more detail which may be useful when you
                                                                       3. Press the OK button.
are looking for fish. If you select a slower speed the information
remains on the display for longer.
The following option is available:                                     Dual / Single frequency fishfinder
· Manual. This allows you to set the scroll speed as a percentage of   Dual frequency operation allows the sonar to operate and display 2
  the maximum scroll rate for that depth. The lower the percentage,    frequencies simultaneously. If the preset mode that you are using
  the slower the image will scroll. The default setting is 100%.       has two frequencies, you can view either one or both of those
                                                                       frequencies in separate windows.
Scroll pause
                                                                       Selecting dual frequency view
You can pause the display to see a `snapshot' of the fishfinder
image. When the image is paused scrolling stops but the depth          From the main fishfinder screen:
indication continues to be updated. Scroll pause/resume affects the    1. Select the PRESET 2 DUAL softkey.
currently selected fishfinder frequency.
                                                                       2. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
If you are in dual frequency mode, you can pause one frequency         3. Use the VIEW softkey to switch between the available views.
while the other continues to scroll. This allows you to inspect a
paused image while the other frequency continues to scroll and
detect fish.

 Note: Scrolling will resume if the frequency changes. For
 example an automatic change of frequency resulting from a
 change in depth.

Adjusting the fishfinder scrolling speed
From the fishfinder screen:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the Fishfinder Setup menu item.
3. Select Manual Scroll Speed .

190                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
12.7 Fishfinder waypoints                                               12.8 Fishfinder alarms
Placing a waypoint on the fishfinder display enables you to mark a      The display can be configured to provide a number of fishfinder
position that you can return to later.                                  alarms.
When a waypoint is placed, its details are added to the waypoint list   The following fishfinder alarms can be set when you are connected
and a vertical line labelled WPT is displayed on screen. You can edit   to a DSM, or when the simulator is on:
waypoints and navigate to them in the fishfinder window.
                                                                        · Fish alarms sound when a target meets the specified sensitivity
                                                                          level and, is within the depth limits (if enabled). The greater the
                                                                          fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of target image
                                                                          depths displayed.
                                                                        · Shallow/Deep alarms sound when the DSM detects that the
                                                                          depth is less than the shallow limit, or greater than the deep limit.

                                                                        Setting up fishfinder alarms
                                                                        Fishfinder alarms are configured within the alarms set up menu.
                                                                        1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                        2. Select the Alarm Setup menu item.
                                                                        3. Select Fishfinder Alarms Setup .
                                                                        4. Use the menu items to make the required changes.
                                                                        5. Press the OK button to save the changes.

Placing a Waypoint on the Fishfinder Display
With the fishfinder screen active:
1. Press the WPTS/MOB button.
2. Select the appropriate option: WAYPOINT AT CURSOR ,
   WAYPOINT AT VESSEL, or WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON.




Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                        191
12.9 Fishfinder setup
Opening the fishfinder setup menu
In the fishfinder application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the Fishfinder Setup menu item.




192                                         G-Series User reference
Fishfinder setup menu options
This section describes the settings you can change using the fishfinder setup menu. The setup menu contains settings that are likely
to be changed infrequently.
 Menu Item                           Description                                                              Options
 Configure Preset Frequencies        Enables you to adjust the frequencies used for the four fishfinder       AUTO or manual frequencies.
                                     presets. For each preset, you can select AUTO for fully
                                     automatic selection, or you can manually specify the frequency.
                                     You can also reset all the preset frequencies to the factory
                                     defaults if required.
 Depth Digit Size                    Size of the digit that indicates the depth.                              · Small
                                                                                                              · Medium
                                                                                                              · Large
 Depth Digit Position                Position of the digit that indicates the depth.                          · Bottom
                                                                                                              · Top
 Target Depth ID                     Controls whether the depth of identified targets are displayed.          · On
                                     The level of targets displayed is directly linked to the level of Fish
                                     Alarm sensitivity.                                                       · Off

 Depth Lines                         Controls whether horizontal lines indicating depth are displayed.        · On
                                                                                                              · Off
 White Line                          When set to ON, this option displays a white line along the              · On
                                     contour of the sea bottom. This helps to distinguish objects
                                     close to the sea bed.                                                    · Off

 Bottom Fill                         When set to ON, this option displays a solid color fill for the sea      · On
                                     bottom.
                                                                                                              · Off




Using the fishfinder                                                                                                                        193
 Menu Item                            Description                                                         Options
 Color Palette                        Various color palettes are available to suit different conditions   · Classic Blue
                                      and your personal preferences.
                                                                                                          · Classic Black
                                                                                                          · Classic White
                                                                                                          · Sunburst
                                                                                                          · Greyscale
                                                                                                          · Inverted Greyscale
                                                                                                          · Copper
                                                                                                          · Night Vision
 Manual Scroll Speed                  Specify the fishfinder scroll speed.                                10 to 100%


Fishfinder preset configuration                                                · Auto. When operating in automatic frequency the system will set
                                                                                 and adjust the frequency automatically to suit your transducer
Sonar frequency                                                                  and operating conditions.
The frequency of the sonar determines the width of the sonar beam,             Dual operation
the depth to which the signals will penetrate and the resolution
of the image. Each of the preset operating modes has its own                   For dual frequency operation you can set Frequency 2 for the
frequency settings.                                                            required preset operating modes.
The frequencies supported depend upon the DSM and transducer                   Setting the fishfinder frequency
connected to your system.                                                      With the configure presets frequencies options you can:
· Lower frequencies (e.g. 50 kHz) produce a wide sonar beam                    · Specify one or two frequencies for each of the four presets.
  and penetrate the water well. A lower frequency provides a lower
  resolution image that may not be as good at detecting small fish.            · Edit preset names.
  Use lower frequencies if you require a large coverage beneath                · Reset presets to factory defaults.
  your boat or if you are in deep water.
                                                                               1.   From the main fishfinder screen, press the MENU button.
· Higher frequencies (e.g. 200 kHz) produce narrow beam                        2.   Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.
  and produce a high resolution image. They are most useful in
  shallower water (up to 1000 ft) and at higher speeds.                        3.   Select Configure Preset Frequencies from the list of options.
                                                                               4.   Make the required changes for each preset mode (P1 to P4)

194                                                                                                                              G-Series User reference
Changing fishfinder preset names
1.   From the main fishfinder screen, press the MENU button.
2.   Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.
3.   Select Configure Preset Frequencies from the list of options.
4.   Use the trackpad to select the required preset.
5.   Press the EDIT NAME softkey
6.   Use the rotary control and trackpad to change the name
7.   Press OK when complete.




Using the fishfinder                                                 195
Transducer and DSM settings
Selecting the DSM and transducer settings
From the main fishfinder screen:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Fishfinder Setup from the list of options.
3. Select from the list of menu options:
      · Transducer Settings
      · DSM Settings

Fishfinder DSM Setup Menu Options
Nearby vessels equipped with a fishfinder, or certain physical conditions (like hard seabeds), can affect the DSM. Its setup menus enable
you to change settings to allow for this.
 Menu Item                            Description                                                          Options
 DSM Reset                            Restore all settings on the DSM to factory default. When             Yes, No
                                      performing a DSM Reset, it is normal to briefly loose connection
                                      with the DSM.
 Trip Counter Reset                   Resets the Trip Counter of the DSM.                                  Yes, No
 SONAR Interference Rejection         Removes spikes caused by other fishfinder-equipped vessels.          Auto, Low, Medium, High
 2nd Echo Interference Rejection      Adjusts the ping rate in small increments, according to the 2nd      Off, Low, High
                                      echo level. This results in better sensitivity of the image.
 Ping Rate Limit (per second)         Provides a speed limiter; it is useful to adjust the ping rate to    5 to 30 pings per second (30 default)
                                      suit local conditions. For example, the ping rate may be too fast
                                      when there is a hard bottom in shallow water. This setting reverts
                                      to 26 pings per second when the DSM unit is powered off.
 Ping Enable                          The sonar ping is normally enabled. It can be disabled. This is      Disabled, Enabled
                                      useful when other equipment is being tested, or if someone is
                                      diving beneath the boat. This setting reverts to Enabled when
                                      the DSM unit is powered off.

196                                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
Fishfinder Transducer Calibration
Your fishfinder transducer must be calibrated correctly to achieve
accurate depth readings.
The multifunction display receives the image from a DSM which
processes sonar signals from a transducer mounted in the water.
If the transducer is equipped with a speed paddle wheel and
temperature-sensing thermistor, the DSM calculates speed and
temperature. To ensure accurate readings, it may be necessary to
calibrate the transducer(s) by applying offsets to depth, speed and
temperature. As these settings are held in the DSM and relate to
the transducer, they are applied system-wide.

Fishfinder transducer settings

 Menu Item                            Description                                                     Options
 Select Transducer                    Select the appropriate transducer type from those displayed.    · B256/M256
                                                                                                      · B260/M260/SS560
                                                                                                      · R99/R199
                                                                                                      · B258
                                                                                                      · SS270/B264
                                                                                                      · B164
                                                                                                      · R209/R299
 Select Speed Transducer              Select the appropriate speed transducer from those available.   · NONE
                                      This option is only available if you are not using a combined
                                      Depth/Speed or Depth/Speed/Temperature transducer.              · UNKNOWN
                                                                                                      · B120/P120 ST600
                                                                                                      · ST69
                                                                                                      · B120/P120 ST800
                                                                                                      · CS4500

Using the fishfinder                                                                                                      197
 Menu Item                  Description                                                      Options
 Frequency Calibration      Fine tune the frequency of the transducer.                       Variable setting for the selected frequency.
 Depth Offset (waterline)   Offset represents the depth of the transducer (relative to the   ­9.9 to +9.9 feet
                            waterline).
 Speed Offset               Offset applied to the speed log.                                 0 to 100%
 Temperature Offset         Offset applied to the temperature transducer value.              ­9.9 to +9.9 °F




198                                                                                                                         G-Series User reference
Chapter 13: Using the engine application

Chapter contents
·    13.1 Engine application overview on page 200
·    13.2 Displaying the engine application on page 200
·    13.3 Setting up the engine application on page 201
·    13.4 Changing the engine panel dial color on page 201
·    13.5 Pre-configured data panels on page 202
·    13.6 Changing what the engine application displays on page 204




Using the engine application                                          199
13.1 Engine application overview                                      13.2 Displaying the engine application
The engine application enables you to view key engine data in your    With the home screen displayed:
multifunction display.                                                1. Select a page that includes the engine monitor application.
The engine application enables you to view information in the form       The engine monitor application is displayed.
of gauges and digital data, from up to three compatible engines.
To provide a fast update rate, the engine data is transferred from
the engine's serial interface to your multifunction display via
NMEA2000/SeaTalk2.
If the default range of data shown by the engine application is not
suitable, you can change what is displayed.




 Note: For details of compatible engines and related
 software updates, please refer to the Raymarine website at
 www.raymarine.com.




200                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
13.3 Setting up the engine application                                13.4 Changing the engine panel dial
In   the engine application:
                                                                      color
1.    Press the MENU button.                                          In   the Engine application:
2.    Select Panel Setup Menu .                                       1.    Press the MENU button.
3.    Select Number of Engines , then select the appropriate value.   2.    Select Panel Setup Menu.
4.    Select the Maximum tachometer range menu item, then select      3.    Use the Engine Panel Dials menu item to select the Light
      the appropriate value.                                                Background or Dark Background option, as appropriate.




Using the engine application                                                                                                           201
13.5 Pre-configured data panels
By default, a pre-configured range of data is displayed in a number
of data 'panels'. Each panel consists of a number of 'cells', each
containing a different item of data.

 Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects
 the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
 affect any networked displays.




202                                                                     G-Series User reference
List of pre-configured engine panels
A range of pre-configured panels show commonly used data.
The following table shows the data displayed by each type of panel. Each data item listed in the table below represents a 'cell'.

 Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
 affect any networked displays.

                                                                                                     Engine and
 Data                               Engine                Engine and fuel      Fuel resources        resources             Twin engines
 Tacho and engine hours

 Oil pressure

 Engine coolant temperature

 Boost pressure

 Alternator

 Fuel level (tanks 1, 2, 3)

 Total fuel

 Load



Selecting a pre-configured data panel
In the data or engine application:
1. Using the softkeys, select the pre-configured data panel you
    want to use.

Using the engine application                                                                                                              203
13.6 Changing what the engine                                        Changing the size of data panels
application displays                                                 Inthe data or engine application:
                                                                     1. Press the MENU button.
In   the engine application:
                                                                     2. Select Panel Setup Menu.
1.    Press the MENU button.
                                                                     3. Select the data panel you want to resize (Configure...).
2.    Select Panel Setup Menu .
                                                                     4. Select the MERGE CELLS softkey if you want to merge the
3.    Select the appropriate Configure: menu item.                      contents of the cell with an adjacent cell, resulting in a bigger cell.
      A red outline appears around the main data element in the      5. Select the SPLIT CELL softkey if you want to split the size of
      engine monitoring application.                                    the cell in half.
4.    Highlight the data element that you want to change.
5.    Select the SELECT DATA softkey.
6.    Select the appropriate data group.
7.    Select the appropriate category, then select the appropriate
      option.
The engine display will be updated to show the data that you
specified.

 Note: You can also access the SELECT DATA softkey by
 pressing and holding the physical softkey associated with the
 data panel you want to customize (for example, NAVIGATION).


Renaming data panels
Inthe data or engine application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Panel Setup Menu.
3. Select the panel you want to rename (Configure...).
4. Select the RENAME PANEL softkey.
   The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
5. Enter the new name for the data panel.
6. Select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.

204                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
Chapter 14: Using the data application

Chapter contents
·    14.1 Data application overview on page 206
·    14.2 Pre-configured data panels on page 207
·    14.3 Trim tab calibration on page 210
·    14.4 Customizing the data application on page 210




Using the data application                               205
14.1 Data application overview
The data application displays system and instrument data on your
multifunction display.
The data application enables you to view numeric data generated
by the system. It also shows data from instruments connected to
your multifunction display using the NMEA or SeaTalk protocols.




206                                                                G-Series User reference
14.2 Pre-configured data panels
By default, a pre-configured range of data is displayed in a number
of data 'panels'. Each panel consists of a number of 'cells', each
containing a different item of data.

 Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects
 the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
 affect any networked displays.




Using the data application                                              207
List of pre-configured data panels
A range of pre-configured panels show commonly used data.
The following table shows the data displayed by each type of panel. Each data item listed in the table below represents a 'cell'.

 Note: Panel selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects the individual display that you are currently using. It does not
 affect any networked displays.

 Data                               Navigation panel      Waypoint panel       Route panel           Fishing panel         Sailing panel
 Vessel Position

 Active Waypoint

 TTG

 VMG -- Waypoint

 Depth

 COG / SOG

 Heading

 Speed

 Set / Drift

 XTE

 Trip


208                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
 Data                              Navigation panel    Waypoint panel   Route panel   Fishing panel   Sailing panel
 Local Time

 Sea Temperature

 Ground Wind

 App Wind

 True Wind

 VMG Wind



Selecting a pre-configured data panel
In the data or engine application:
1. Using the softkeys, select the pre-configured data panel you
    want to use.




Using the data application                                                                                            209
14.3 Trim tab calibration                                              14.4 Customizing the data application
You can calibrate your trim tabs from your multifunction display.      You can customize the data application to show the system and
                                                                       instrument data that you require.
Trim tab data can be displayed in the Engine, Data, and CDI
applications by selecting it from the Engine Data Group, using the     In addition to displaying the default, pre-configured data panels in
Panel Setup Menu.                                                      the data application, you can also customize the data panels to
                                                                       your specific requirements.
To ensure that accurate data is displayed, you must calibrate your
                                                                       You can customize each data panel by changing:
trim tabs. The calibration option is available in the Panel Setup
Menu.                                                                  · The panel name.
                                                                       · The size and number of data panels.
Calibrating trim tabs                                                  · The data contained in each data panel. This data can include any
In the Engine, Data, or CDI application, and your physical trim tabs     transducer or internally calculated navigation data that is available
accessible to you:                                                       on NMEA or SeaTalk. Additional data includes a compass rose, a
                                                                         distance log, and four resettable trip counters.
1. Press the MENU button on your multifunction display.
2. Select Panel Setup Menu.                                            · How the data is displayed. You can control whether the data
                                                                         is displayed in numerals, digits, gauge, or graphical format, as
3. Select Calibrate Trim Tabs.                                           appropriate for each data item.
    The Trim Tab Calibration dialog is displayed.

 Note: The Calibrate Trim Tabs menu item is NOT available if           Selecting customized data in the data
 the Trim Tabs menu item shows "Not Detected".                         application
4. Set both physical Trim Tabs in the UP position.                     In   the data application:
5. Press the OK button on your multifunction display.                  1.    Press the MENU button.
6. Set both physical Trim Tabs in the DOWN position,                   2.    Select Panel Setup Menu .
   simultaneously.                                                     3.    Select the appropriate Configure: menu item.
7. Wait for the Calibration Complete message.                                A red outline appears around the main data element in the data
                                                                             application.
8. Press the OK button.
                                                                       4.    Highlight the data element that you want to change.
                                                                       5.    Select the SELECT DATA softkey.
                                                                       6.    Select the appropriate menu items to choose the Data Group
                                                                             and Data that you want to see in the cell you selected.
                                                                       7.    Select the appropriate menu items to choose the relevant data
                                                                             type for that particular data.

210                                                                                                                      G-Series User reference
 Note: You can also access the SELECT DATA softkey by
 pressing and holding the physical softkey associated with the
 data panel you want to customize (for example, NAVIGATION).


Renaming data panels
Inthe data or engine application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Panel Setup Menu.
3. Select the panel you want to rename (Configure...).
4. Select the RENAME PANEL softkey.
   The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
5. Enter the new name for the data panel.
6. Select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.

Changing the size of data panels
Inthe data or engine application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Panel Setup Menu.
3. Select the data panel you want to resize (Configure...).
4. Select the MERGE CELLS softkey if you want to merge the
   contents of the cell with an adjacent cell, resulting in a bigger cell.
5. Select the SPLIT CELL softkey if you want to split the size of
   the cell in half.




Using the data application                                                   211
212   G-Series User reference
Chapter 15: Using the weather application (North America only)

Chapter contents
·    15.1 Weather application overview on page 214
·    15.2 Displaying the weather application on page 214
·    15.3 Weather application setup on page 215
·    15.4 Weather application display overview on page 215
·    15.5 Weather map navigation on page 219
·    15.6 Weather reports on page 219
·    15.7 Storm tracking on page 220
·    15.8 Animated weather graphics on page 221




Using the weather application (North America only)               213
15.1 Weather application overview                                       15.2 Displaying the weather application
The weather application overlays historical, live, and forecasted       With the home screen displayed:
weather graphics on a world map.                                        1. Select a page that includes the weather application.
The weather application can only be used in North America and              The weather application is displayed.
its coastal waters.
The weather application graphics and their associated weather data
enable you to determine the actual conditions in the vicinity of your
vessel, or at a particular location.
Weather forecasts and warnings, detailing both current and
predicted conditions, are regularly updated in the weather
application.

 Note: For types of warnings, watches, and advisories, refer to
 the NOAA website at www.nws.noaa.gov

Disclaimer -- advisory only
The weather information is subject to service interruptions and may
contain errors or inaccuracies and consequently should not be
relied upon exclusively. You are urged to check alternate weather
information sources prior to making safety related decisions. You
acknowledge and agree that you shall be solely responsible for use
of the information and all decisions taken with respect thereto. By
using this service, you release and waive any claims against Sirius
Satellite Radio Inc., WSI, Navcast Incorporated, and Raymarine
with regard to this service.
If you do not have the subscription agreement, you may view a copy
on the internet at www.sirius.com/marineweather




214                                                                                                                     G-Series User reference
15.3 Weather application setup                                         15.4 Weather application display
A number of steps must be completed before you can use the
                                                                       overview
weather application for the first time.
                                                                       The weather application displays a range of graphics to indicate
· Obtain a Sirius ID number, by contacting Sirius and subscribing to   weather conditions and forecast information.
  a weather and/or audio service package. Before subscribing, you      The following diagram illustrates the main features of the weather
  must first record your data and/or audio Electronic Serial Number    application display:
  (ESN). This number is located on the weather receiver shipping
  carton, or on the back of the weather receiver itself. For more         Range                     Animation time/data                           Signal strength
  information, refer to www.sirius.com.
                                                                           2400 nm                       12:00 22/11                                  Medium        Status
· Your multifunction display must be connected to a Raymarine                                                                                                       bar
  SR100 Sirius weather receiver.                                                                                                                                    Marine
                                                                                                                                                                    zone
· You must be navigating within US coastal waters.
· The weather application must be added to at least one page on
  the home screen.                                                                                                                                                  Surface
                                                                                                                                                                    observation
· You must specify the weather graphics that you want to display on                                                                                                 stations
  the weather map.
                                                                                                                                                                    Wave
Selecting weather graphics                                                                                                                                          heights

In the weather application:
1. Press the DISPLAY GRAPHICS softkey.                                        FIND SHIP
                                                                                           DISPLA Y
                                                                                          GRAPHICS ...
                                                                                                              ANIMATE
                                                                                                             WEATHER...
                                                                                                                                WEATHER
                                                                                                                               REPOR TS . ..
                                                                                                                                               PRESENT ATION...


2. Using the trackpad, select the ON option for each graphic that




                                                                                                                                                                                  D8564_1
    you want displayed on the weather map.                                                                 Weather soft keys

3. Press the OK button.                                                When you move the cursor over the graphics in the display,
                                                                       additional information is shown. The type of graphics that appear in
                                                                       the display are described in the following sections.




Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                                                            215
Weather symbols                                                                                    Storm tracks symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent                                       The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
different weather conditions and forecasts.                                                        different types of storm tracks.


           24               26

             22           22                                                                              Hurricane (Category 1-5)             Tropical storm          Tropical disturbance
                                                                                                                                                                                          ,
                                                                                                                                                                       tropical depression


             Storm cast                     Waves            Canadian radar (Dark greens-yellow)
                                       (See waves section)
                                                                                                   Surface pressure symbols
                                                                                                   The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
                                             Or                                                    different surface pressure conditions.

             Lightning                       Wind                 Sea surface temperature
                                                                   ( green-yellow-orange)


                                                                                                     High / low pressure (blue & red)      Warm front (red)             Cold front (blue)




  Surface observ
               ation stations (pink)      Cities (grey)         NOWRad (green-yellow-red)
                                                                Snow (Blues),Mixture (Pinks)             Occluded front (purple)        Stationary front (red-blue)     Trough (brown)
                                                                                                                                                                                 1010



                                                                                                                                                                          1012

                                                                                                            Squall line (red)                 Dry line (red)             Isobars (grey)




216                                                                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
Surface observation station symbols                                                                                      Wave information symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent                                                             The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
different types of surface obervation station.                                                                           different types of wave information.
                                                                                                                          Wa ve height r anges
 All surface observ
                  ations stations are representedby a pink symbol:


                                                                                                                                                                    Waves shown in




                                                                                                             D8975-1
 Buoy Station                   C - MAN                          WSI                           NWS                                         Florida                  16 shades of colour from:
                                                                                                                                                                    Reds - Highest w aves
                                                                                                                                                                    Greens - Intermediate waves
                                                                                                                                                                    Blues - Lowest w aves
Wind speed symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent
different wind speeds.
Wind speed symbols

                                                                                                                                                     Cuba




                                                                                                                                                                                                     D8603_1
    3-7 kts   8-12 kts 13-17 kts 18-22 kts 23-27 kts 28-32 kts 33-37 kts 38-42 kts 43-47 kts 48-52 kts




                                                                                                      etc.


    53-57 kts 58-62 kts 63-67 kts 68-72 kts 73-77 kts 78-82 kts 83-87 kts 88-92 kts 93-97 kts 98-102 kts
                                                                                                               D8571_1




                                                                                                                                                                                                   D10850-1
                                                                                                                                  Wave Period                    Wave Direction




Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                                                                                217
NOWRad precipitation color codes                                      Color code   Intensity in mm per hour
NOWRad displays the type and level of precipitation:                  Dark green   4.01 to 12.00 mm/hr
 Color code                Precipitation type        Intensity        Yellow       12.01 to 24.00 mm/hr
 Light green               Rain                      (15 to 19 dBz)   Orange       24.01 to 50.00 mm/hr
 Medium green              Rain                      (20 to 29 dBz)   Light red    50.01 to 100 mm/hr
 Dark Green                Rain                      (30 to 39 dBz)   Dark red     100.01+ mm/hr
 Yellow                    Rain                      (40 to 44 dBz)
 Orange                    Rain                      (45 to 49 dBz)
 Light red                 Rain                      (50 to 54 dBz)
 Dark red                  Rain                      (55+ dBz)
 Light blue                Snow                      (5 to 19 dBz)
 Dark blue                 Snow                      (20+ dBz)
 Light pink                Mixed                     (5 to 19 dBz)
 Dark pink                 Mixed                     (20+ dBz)


Canadian radar precipitation color codes
Canadian radar shows the intensity of precipitation for Canada.
Unlike NOWRad, Canadian radar does not show the precipitation
type.
 Color code                             Intensity in mm per hour
 Transparent (nothing shown at very     0.00 to 0.20 mm/hr
 low precipitation)
 Light green                            0.21 to 1.00 mm/hr
 Medium green                           1.01 to 4.00 mm/hr

218                                                                                                G-Series User reference
15.5 Weather map navigation                                               15.6 Weather reports
You can move around the weather map and place waypoints.                  You can view a number of different weather reports to give you a
                                                                          comprehensive view of the weather.
When you open the weather application, a world map is displayed.
If the system has a position fix for your boat, the map will be centred   Your multifunction display shows weather reports for:
on your boat. As in the chart application, use the cursor to move
                                                                          · Tropical statements.
around the map and view different locations, and the Range control
to zoom in and out. Use the WPTS MOB button to place waypoints.           · Marine warnings.
                                                                          · Marine zone forecasts.
Re-centering your vessel on the weather map
                                                                          · Marine watchbox warnings.
In the weather application:
1. Press the FIND SHIP softkey.                                           Tropical statements
                                                                          Tropical statements provide information on tropical weather
                                                                          conditions. This information may not be available in all areas.

                                                                          Marine warnings
                                                                          You can display a report for the current marine warnings in the US
                                                                          coastal or near shore areas, or for the zone around your cursor
                                                                          or vessel.

                                                                          Marine zone forecasts
                                                                          These forecasts cover:
                                                                          · US Coastal Weather Forecasts and Offshore Forecasts and High
                                                                            Seas Forecast, or
                                                                          · Great Lakes Forecast and Near Shore Forecast, or
                                                                          · Canadian Coastal Weather Forecast.

                                                                          Marine watchbox warnings
                                                                          When a tornado or thunderstorm warning is received within the
                                                                          specified range of your vessel (MENU > Weather Setup Menu >
                                                                          Marine Watchbox Alerts), the system generates a watchbox alert.
                                                                          This alert provides information on the type of warning and validity
                                                                          period. The full watchbox report text is also displayed.
Using the weather application (North America only)                                                                                          219
Displaying weather reports                                  15.7 Storm tracking
In the weather application:
                                                            The storm tracking function enables you to monitor significant
1. Press the WEATHER REPORTS softkey.                       storms in the area.
2. Select the TROPICAL STATEMENTS, MARINE WARNINGS,         Examples of significant storms include tropical disturbances,
    MARINE ZONE FORECASTS, or WATCHBOX WARNINGS             depressions, storms and cyclones, hurricanes, typhoons, and super
    softkey, as appropriate.                                typhoons.
The relevant report, warning, or statement is displayed.    The weather map displays the track that the storm has taken, its
                                                            current and forecasted position, the wind radii (current position
Changing the position of forecasts on the                   only), direction, and speed of travel.
weather map                                                 Storm tracks are highlighted on the weather map in the form of
                                                            symbols, as shown below.
In the weather application:
                                                            When you move the cursor over a symbol, additional storm
1. Press the WEATHER REPORTS softkey.                       information is displayed.
2. Press the FORECAST AT softkey until the CURSOR or SHIP
    option is selected, as appropriate.

 Note: You cannot change the position of TROPICAL
 STATEMENTS or WATCHBOX WARNINGS.                                Hurricane (Category 1-5)   Tropical storm    Tropical disturbance
                                                                                                                                 ,
                                                                                                              tropical depression




220                                                                                                          G-Series User reference
15.8 Animated weather graphics
You can view animated weather graphics to provide an indication
of changing weather patterns.
The animated weather option enables you to view an animation
from the current time for:
· The forecast for wind, wave, or surface pressure.
· The weather radar history loop (NOWRad).

Running a weather animation
In the weather application:
1. Press the ANIMATE WEATHER softkey.
2. Press the ANIMATE TYPE softkey until the F'CAST (forecast) or
    N'RAD (NOWRad) option is selected, as appropriate.
3. If the F'CAST option is selected, press the FORECAST softkey
    until the WIN (wind), WAV (waves), or PRES (pressure) option is
    selected, as appropriate.
4. Press the ANIMATE softkey until the ON option is selected.
5. Press the OK button.

 Note: You cannot display information (by moving the cursor over
 a symbol) when animation is running. The range and trackpad
 controls do however remain operable provided the PAUSE option
 has not been selected. Ranging /panning will cause the animation
 to restart.

 Note: The animation will be switched to OFF, whenever the
 ACTIVE, PAGE, DATA, WPTS MOB, or MENU buttons are
 pressed, or when the animation screen is closed and you return
 to the default weather screen.




Using the weather application (North America only)                    221
222   G-Series User reference
Chapter 16: Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)

Chapter contents
·    16.1 Sirius radio overview on page 224
·    16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio application on page 224
·    16.3 Sirius radio basic operations on page 225
·    16.4 Sirius radio presets on page 226
·    16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts on page 227
·    16.6 Sirius radio parental locking on page 228




Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)               223
16.1 Sirius radio overview                                               16.2 Displaying the Sirius radio
You can use your multifunction display to control a connected Sirius
                                                                         application
Satellite Radio receiver.
                                                                         With the home screen displayed:
Your multifunction display provides access to basic and advanced         1. Select a page that includes the Sirius Satellite Radio application.
audio functions on a connected Sirius Satellite Radio receiver.
                                                                         The Sirius Satellite Radio application is displayed:
The Sirius Satellite Radio service is only available in North America.
From your multifunction display, you can:
· Tune to a Sirius radio channel.
· Browse a Sirius radio channel without tuning to it.
· Scan for Sirius radio channels (tune to all channels in turn).
· Set up Sirius radio presets for fast access to commonly used
  channels.
· Set up a parental lock on a Sirius radio channel.
· Receive alerts for favorite songs and artists.

Multiple applications
With most applications, it is possible to run 4 instances of the same
application at any one time. However there are 2 exceptions to
this, which are:
· Chart application -- maximum 2 simultaneous instances per
  multifunction display.
· Sirius satellite radio application -- maximum 1 instance per
  multifunction display, at any one time.
· Video application -- maximum 1 instance per multifunction
  display, at any one time.




224                                                                                                                        G-Series User reference
16.3 Sirius radio basic operations                                        Scanning Sirius radio channels
You can tune, browse, and scan Sirius Radio channels using your           Inthe Sirius Satellite Radio application:
multifunction display.                                                    1. Select the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
                                                                          2. Select the SCAN CHANNELS softkey.
Tuning and browsing
                                                                          3. Select the SCAN ALL/PRE softkey to scan all channels, or only
You can tune to a channel using the following methods:                       preset channels.
· using the trackpad, you can tune to the previous or next channel        4. Use the SELECT softkey to stop the scan at anytime and listen
  sequentially, or the first channel in the previous or next category;       to the active channel.
· using the browse function (ALL or PRESET) to locate a channel
  with the trackpad or rotary control, and then the TUNE TO               Showing or hiding Sirius radio channels
  CHANNEL softkey to listen.
                                                                          In   the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
Scanning                                                                  1.    Select the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
The scanning function automatically tunes to all channels in turn.        2.    Select the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS option.
                                                                          3.    Select the channel you want to hide.
Tuning to a Sirius radio channel                                          4.    Select the CHANNEL SHOWN and CHANNEL HIDDEN
Inthe Sirius Satellite Radio application:                                       softkeys to toggle between SHOW and HIDE.
1. Press the trackpad up to tune to the next available channel.
2. Press the trackpad down to tune to the previous channel.
3. Press the trackpad right to tune to the first channel in the next
   category.
4. Press the trackpad left to tune to the first channel in the previous
   category.

Browsing Sirius radio channels
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
1. Select the BROWSE softkey.
    The Channel List or Preset List is displayed.
2. Using the trackpad, scroll through the available channels.
3. Select the TUNE TO CHANNEL softkey to listen to the selected
    channel.
Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)                                                                                      225
16.4 Sirius radio presets                                           2. Select the preset you want to delete the channel from.
You can assign up to 18 Sirius Radio channels to presets to make    3. Select the DELETE CHANNEL softkey.
it easier to find commonly used channels.
Each channel must be assigned to a different preset. You can also   Moving a Sirius radio channel to another preset
move channels between presets, and delete existing presets.
                                                                    In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
The following screenshot shows the Sirius Radio Preset List:
                                                                    1. Select the PRESETS softkey.
                                                                        The Preset List is displayed.
                                                                    2. Select the preset that contains the channel you want to move.
                                                                    3. Select the MOVE TO NEW PRESET softkey.
                                                                    4. Select the preset you want to move the channel to.
                                                                    5. Select the MOVE TO NEW PRESET softkey.




Assigning Sirius radio channel presets
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
1. Select the PRESETS softkey.
    The Preset List is displayed.
2. Select an unused preset number from the Preset List.
3. Select the ASSIGN NEW CHANNEL softkey.
4. Select the target channel.

Deleting a Sirius radio channel from a preset
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
1. Select the PRESETS softkey.
    The Preset List is displayed.

226                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
16.5 Favorite Sirius radio song alerts                                  2. Select the ADD SONG or ADD ARTIST softkey, as appropriate.
                                                                           The song or artist is added as a favorite.
The favorites feature alerts you when a favorite song or artist is
playing on any Sirius Radio channel.                                    3. If you want to add an alert for the song or artist at this time, use
                                                                           the ALERTS ON/OFF softkey to select the ON option.
When favorite alerts are enabled and a favorite song or artist is
played on any channel, an alert is displayed and an alarm sounds.
You can add a song or artist as a favorite when you hear it being
played on a Sirius radio channel. You can then add an alert for it at
that time, or at anytime in the future.
You can define up to 10 favorite songs or artists.
The following screenshot shows an example of a Sirius radio song
alert:




Setting up Sirius radio favorite alerts
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application when your favorite song
or artist is playing:
1. Select the ALERTS softkey.
    The Edit Alerts dialog is displayed.
Using Sirius satellite radio (North America only)                                                                                           227
16.6 Sirius radio parental locking                                      3. Select the channel you want to block access to.
                                                                        4. Select the LOCKED option with the CHANNEL
You can block certain Sirius Radio channels to prevent unauthorized        ENABLED/LOCKED softkey.
access.
                                                                        5. Repeat Steps 3 to 4 for each channel you want to block.
When you enable the "Parental Locking" function, you can assign a
password to a channel to restrict access to it.                         6. Select the CLEAR softkey.
Subsequently, it will not be possible to listen to the channel unless   7. Select the ON option with the PARENTAL LOCK softkey.
the correct password is entered first.                                  8. At the prompt, enter your password.
                                                                        Blocked channels remain visible in channel lists, but you cannot
Setting up Sirius radio parental locking                                select them, and they are ignored by the scan function. Blocked
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:                              channels are marked as locked by an icon next to the channel name.
1. Select the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
2. Select the ON option for the PARENTAL LOCK softkey.                  Accessing a blocked Sirius radio channel
    The Password Setup dialog is displayed.                             In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
3. Enter and confirm your password and hint.                            1. Select the SETUP CHANNELS or BROWSE softkey to find the
4. Select SAVE.                                                             blocked channel.
                                                                            When you select a blocked channel, you are prompted for your
Changing the Sirius radio password                                          password.
                                                                        2. Enter your password.
In   the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
                                                                        3. Select the OK button.
1.    Select the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
2.    Select the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey.                           If you enter an incorrect password more than 3 times, your password
                                                                        hint is displayed.
3.    Select the EDIT LOCKOUT PASSWORD softkey.
4.    Enter your old password.
5.    Enter your new password and password hint.
6.    Select SAVE.

Blocking a Sirius radio channel
In the Sirius Satellite Radio application:
1. Select the SETUP CHANNELS softkey.
2. Select the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey.
    The Channel List is displayed.

228                                                                                                                    G-Series User reference
Chapter 17: Using Navtex

Chapter contents
·    17.1 Navtex overview on page 230
·    17.2 Navtex setup on page 230
·    17.3 Viewing and managing Navtex messages on page 231




Using Navtex                                                 229
17.1 Navtex overview                                                  17.2 Navtex setup
The Navtex features enable you to view marine safety information,     In order to receive Navtex alerts on your multifunction display, you
including weather forecasts and marine safety warnings.               must connect a Navtex receiver and configure the NMEA options on
With a suitable Navtex receiver connected to your multifunction       your multifunction display.
display, you can view marine safety information, including weather    Before you are able to receive and view Navtex safety messages on
forecasts and marine warnings.                                        your multifunction display, you must:
Major areas of NAVTEX coverage include the Mediterranean Sea,         · Connect a suitable Navtex receiver to your multifunction display.
The North Sea, coastal areas around Japan, and areas around the
North American continent.                                             · Specify the appropriate baud rate for the relevant NMEA port on
                                                                        your multifunction display (MENU > System Setup > System
Incoming Navtex Message Alerts                                          Integration). You must select the Navtex 4800 or Navtex 9600
                                                                        option if you want to view the Navtex Message List.
Whenever a warning is received by the Navtex receiver, an alert
is displayed on your multifunction display for any category of        · Select the appropriate category of Navtex message that you want
information that you have set up. The alert contains the message        to receive alerts for.
details, and can be erased or saved.
Your multifunction display stores up to 100 messages. Once
capacity is reached, the oldest messages are automatically deleted
to allow for new incoming messages.

Navtex Message Alert Categories
You can configure your multifunction display to show alerts for a
range of different categories of information, including warnings,
reports and services. Examples include navigational warnings, ice
reports, search and rescue information, metereological warnings,
and special services.
These categories are set up using the Navtex Message List.
Selecting the appropriate categories from the list ensures that you
only receive warnings and information that are relevant to you.




230                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
17.3 Viewing and managing Navtex                                       4. Set the receive status to ON or OFF, as appropriate.
messages                                                               5. Repeat Steps 3 to 4 for each category, as appropriate.


Viewing a Navtex message
1. Display the Navtex Message List:
   i. Press the MENU button.
   ii. Select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu item.
       The Navtex message list is displayed.
2. Highlight the message in the list that you want to view.
3. For long messages, scroll the list to view the full message text.

Displaying the Navtex message list
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu item.

Sorting the Navtex message list
1. Display the Navtex Message List:
   i. Press the MENU button.
   ii. Select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu item.
       The Navtex message list is displayed.
2. Select the SORT LIST softkey and choose the DATE, STN
   (Station Identifier), or CAT (Category) option, as appropriate.

Selecting Navtex message alert categories
1. Display the Navtex Message List:
   i. Press the MENU button.
   ii. Select the NAVTEX MESSAGES menu item.
2. Select the SETUP ALERTS softkey.
3. Select the category that you want to receive alerts for.

Using Navtex                                                                                                                       231
232   G-Series User reference
Chapter 18: Using video

Chapter contents
·    18.1 Video application overview on page 234
·    18.2 Video setup on page 235
·    18.3 Using video on page 236
·    18.4 Video adjustments on page 236
·    18.5 Audio adjustments on page 237




Using video                                        233
18.1 Video application overview
You can view video sources on your G-Series monitors.
The video application enables you to display video sources
connected to the G-Series system via the GVM video module(s).
Video can be viewed on any G-Series monitors on the network. For
example, if you have a thermal imaging camera connected to the
GVM video module, any networked G-Series monitors can display
the video feed.
An audio feed is also available for any video sources connected to
the S-Video input on the GVM video module. The volume can be
adjusted at using a G-Series keyboard if required. Any change to
the volume will be indicated on all the G-Series monitors currently
showing the associated video feed.
You can display multiple video sources simultaneously or cycle
through them (for example, display one video source every 10




                                                                                                                                              D7493_2
seconds).
Each video source is assigned to a softkey for easy access.
Video sources and GVM video modules can be renamed for easy             You can route anything displayed on the G-Series system to an
identification.                                                         external display (for example, a large television). The output
You can also adjust the brightness, contrast, color, and aspect ratio   resolution can be adjusted in the MENU > Display Setup Menu.
of each video source. The orientation of the video image can also
                                                                         Note: You can also connect video sources directly to the VGA,
be changed. For example, if you are viewing a rear-facing camera
                                                                         composite, and S-Video connectors on the rear of the G-Series
on a forward-facing monitor you can use the "Mirror Image" setting
                                                                         monitors. Video sources connected in this way cannot be viewed
to correct the orientation.
                                                                         in the video application. To display these video sources use the
The following image shows an example of a camera feed displayed          buttons located on the front of the monitor, or in the case of Glass
in the video application:                                                Bridge monitors, use the keyboard to access the monitor's On
                                                                         Screen Display (OSD) menu. The G-Series system does NOT
                                                                         provide an audio connection for video sources connected directly
                                                                         to the rear of the monitors.

                                                                         Note: For information on connecting video sources to your
                                                                         system and compatible input configurations refer to the G-Series
                                                                         installation instructions.

234                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
18.2 Video setup                                                   5. Select the Rename GVM400 unit menu item.
                                                                   6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new name, then select
Selecting video source input type                                     SAVE.
The system is compatible with composite and s-video formats.
In the video application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Video Setup.
3. Select the Configure Video System menu item.
4. Select the serial number for the GVM video module that the
    video source is connected to.
5. Select the Type menu item.
6. Select the Composite or S-Video option, as appropriate.

Naming video sources
Inthe video application:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select Video Setup.
3. Select the Configure Video System menu item.
4. Select the serial number that corresponds to the GVM video
   module that the video source is connected to.
5. Select the Rename Video menu item.
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new name, then select
   SAVE.

Naming GVM video modules
In   the video application:
1.    Press the MENU button.
2.    Select Video Setup.
3.    Select the Configure Video System menu item.
4.    Select the serial number that corresponds to the GVM video
      module that the video source is connected to.
Using video                                                                                                                     235
18.3 Using video                                                  18.4 Video adjustments
Switching video sources                                           Adjusting the video picture
In the video application:                                         In the video application:
1. Select the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, or VIDEO 4 softkey to    1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
    view the relevant video source.                               2. Select the CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, or COLOR softkey, as
                                                                      appropriate.
Cycling video sources                                             3. Using the trackpad, adjust the level as required.
In the video application:
1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.                               Changing the video aspect ratio
2. Use the CYCLE VIDEO softkey to select the ON option.           Inthe video application:
                                                                  1. Press the MENU button.
Specifying the video source cycle order and period
                                                                  2. Select Video Setup.
In   the video application:
                                                                  3. Select the Configure Video System menu item.
1.    Press the MENU button.
                                                                  4. Select the serial number for the GVM video module that the
2.    Select Video Setup.                                            video source is connected to.
3.    Select the Setup Video Cycle for this Display menu item.    5. Select the Aspect Ratio menu item.
4.    Select the Cycle 1 menu item.                               6. Select the Auto, 4:3, or 16:9 option, as appropriate.
5.    Select the cycle order for the video sources.
6.    Select the Cycle Period menu item.                          Changing video orientation
7.    Use the rotary control to enter a period between 0 and 99
                                                                  In the video application:
      seconds.
                                                                  1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
                                                                  2. Use the ORIENTATION softkey to select the appropriate option.

                                                                  Changing the video output resolution
                                                                  1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                  2. Select Display Setup.
                                                                  3. Use the Video Output Resolution menu item to adjust the
                                                                     resolution.

236                                                                                                             G-Series User reference
18.5 Audio adjustments
Adjusting the audio volume for video sources
In the video application:
1. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
2. Use the VOLUME softkey to select the ON option.
    The volume slide control is displayed above the softkey.
3. Use the rotary control to adjust the volume level.

 Note: The VOLUME softkey is only available if there is an active
 video source connected to the s-video input of the GVM video
 module, and the video input is configured as "S-Video" in the
 Video Setup menu. There is no volume control for composite
 video sources.




Using video                                                         237
238   G-Series User reference
Chapter 19: Using the thermal camera application

Chapter contents
·    19.1 Thermal camera application overview on page 240
·    19.2 Camera control on page 242
·    19.3 Image adjustments on page 243
·    19.4 Camera setup on page 246




Using the thermal camera application                        239
19.1 Thermal camera application                                       Configuring the GVM video module for a
overview                                                              thermal camera
                                                                      If you want to view and control a thermal camera with your G-Series
The thermal camera application enables you to control a connected     system you must configure the GVM video module, using the
thermal camera and display its image on your multifunction display.   thermal camera application.
Thermal imaging (also known as infrared) cameras enable you to
                                                                      Inthe thermal camera application:
see clearly in low-light and no-light conditions. For example, a
thermal camera can help you navigate at night or identify obstacles   1. Press the MENU button.
in areas of low visibility or even total darkness.                    2. Select Thermal Camera Setup.
The thermal application enables you to:                               3. Select the Select GVM menu item.
· Control the camera:                                                    A list of all connected GVM video modules is displayed, along
                                                                         with serial numbers.
  ­ Pan.
                                                                      4. Select the GVM video module that the thermal camera is
  ­ Tilt.                                                                connected to.
  ­ Zoom (range).                                                     5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for each GVM video module in your system
                                                                         that has a thermal camera connected to it.
  ­ Return camera to "home" (default) position.
                                                                       Note: You can only connect 1 thermal camera to each GVM
  ­ Set the camera "home" position.
                                                                       video module in your G-Series system. When a thermal camera
  ­ Pause the camera image.                                            is connected, each GVM video module is limited to that input
                                                                       only and does NOT support the connection of any further video
  ­ Toggle between visible light and thermal camera lenses.            devices.
  ­ Toggle surveillance mode.
· Adjust the camera image:                                            Displaying the thermal camera application
  ­ Color palette.                                                    With the home screen displayed:
  ­ Scene presets.                                                    1. Select a page icon that includes the thermal camera application.
  ­ Aspect ratio.                                                        The thermal camera application is displayed.
  ­ Brightness.                                                        Note: If the home screen does NOT include a page icon that
  ­ Contrast.                                                          features the thermal camera application you will need to create a
                                                                       new page icon featuring the thermal camera application.
  ­ Color.
  ­ Video polarity (reverse video color).

240                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
Thermal camera status icons                                                         Icon   Description
The thermal camera image includes icons to show the current status                         Zoom setting: 2x zoom.
of the camera.
 Icon                         Description
                              Camera direction indicator.                                  Zoom setting: 4x zoom.



                              Camera home position.                                        Image paused.



                              Scene preset mode for night conditions.                      Single active controller on network.



                              Scene preset mode for daytime conditions.                    Multiple active controllers on network.



                              Scene preset mode for night docking.                         PC / laptop detected on network.



                              Scene preset mode for identifying people or objects
                              in the water.


                              Rear-view mode -- image is flipped horizontally.




Using the thermal camera application                                                                                                 241
19.2 Camera control                                                                      Rotary control -- is used for rotating the camera left or
                                                                                         right (panning).
Thermal camera standby
Standby mode can be used to temporarily suspend the thermal
camera's functions when the camera is not needed for a prolonged
period.                                                                                  Trackpad -- is used for rotating the camera left or right
                                                                                         (panning), or tilting the camera up or down.
When in standby mode the camera:
· Does NOT provide a live video image.
· Moves the camera into its "stowed" (parked) position (lens facing
  down into the camera base) to protect the camera optics.                               Range key -- is used to zoom in and out.
                                                                           OUT
· Engages its pan / tilt motors to hold the camera in place in rough
                                                                           RANGE
  seas.
                                                                            IN

 Note: The "stowed" (parked) position can be configured using the
 camera's setup menu.

Enabling and disabling thermal camera standby                          Thermal camera home position
In the thermal camera application:                                     The home position is a preset position for the camera.
1. Select the OPTIONS softkey.                                         The home position usually defines a useful reference point -- for
                                                                       example, straight ahead and level with the horizon. You can set the
2. Use the CAMERA STANDBY softkey to select ON or OFF                  home position as required and to return the camera to the home
    option, as appropriate.                                            position at any time.
 Note: You can also use any of the camera controls in the thermal                    The home icon appears on-screen momentarily when the
 camera application to "wake" the camera from standby mode.                          camera returns to the home position. The icon flashes when a
                                                                                     new home position is set.

Panning, tilting, and zooming the thermal image
                                                                       Resetting the thermal camera to the home position
Use a combination of the rotary control, trackpad, and range keys to
manipulate the thermal camera view.                                    In the thermal camera application:
                                                                       1. Select the CAMERA HOME softkey.
                                                                           The camera returns to its currently defined home position, and
                                                                           the "Home" icon appears on-screen momentarily.

242                                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
Setting the thermal camera home position                            19.3 Image adjustments
In the thermal camera application:
1. Use the trackpad or rotary control to move the camera to the     Thermal and visible-light operation
    desired position.                                               "Dual payload" thermal cameras are equipped with 2 camera lenses
2. Hold the CAMERA HOME softkey for 3 seconds.                      -- a thermal imaging (infrared) camera lens and a visible-light
    The "Home" icon flashes on-screen to indicate that a new home   camera lens.
    position has been set.                                                                                Thermal camera lens --
                                                                                                          provides night-time imagery,
Pausing the thermal camera image                                                                          based on temperature
                                                                                                          differences between objects.
In   the thermal camera application:                                                                      Thermal imaging produces
1.    Select the OPTIONS softkey.                                                                         a clear image even in total
2.    Select the CAMERA MODES softkey.                                                                    darkness.
3.    Select the PAUSE IMAGE softkey.

Thermal camera surveillance mode
In surveillance mode the camera pans left and right continuously.                                         Visible-light camera lens --
                                                                                                          provides black and white (or
The camera continues to pan until surveillance mode is disabled,                                          greyscale) imagery during the
or the JCU (Joystick Control Unit) or thermal camera application                                          day and in low-light conditions.
controls are used to move the camera. When this occurs the                                                Helps to improve navigational
camera does not automatically resume surveillance mode and the                                            abilities in low-light conditions;
mode must be enabled again if required.                                                                   for example during twilight
                                                                                                          hours when operating along
Enabling and disabling thermal camera surveillance mode                                                   intercoastal waterways and
In   the thermal camera application:                                                                      near harbor entrances.
1.    Select the OPTIONS softkey.
2.    Select the CAMERA MODES softkey.                              Switching between thermal and visible-light camera lenses
3.    Use the SURVEILLANCE MODE softkey to select the ON or         In the thermal camera application:
      OFF option, as appropriate.
                                                                    1. Use the THERMAL / VISIBLE softkey to switch between the
                                                                        2 camera lenses.


Using the thermal camera application                                                                                                     243
 Note: Only "dual payload" thermal cameras feature the ability to                           Night Running -- scene preset mode for night conditions.
 switch between thermal and visible light. The camera's "VIS /
 IR" video cable must be connected to your system if you want to
 switch between the 2 camera lenses.
                                                                                            Day Running -- scene preset mode for daytime
                                                                                            conditions.
Changing the thermal video aspect ratio
In   the thermal camera application:
1.    Select the OPTIONS softkey.                                                           Night Docking -- scene preset mode for night docking.
2.    Select the PRESENTATION softkey.
3.    Use the ASPECT RATIO softkey to select the Auto, 4:3, or 16:9
      option, as appropriate.                                                               Search -- scene preset mode for identifying people or
                                                                                            objects in the water.
Adjusting the thermal camera image
Inthe thermal camera application:                                        Although the preset names indicate their intended use, varying
1. Select the OPTIONS softkey.                                           environmental conditions might make another setting more
2. Select the PRESENTATION softkey.                                      preferable. For example, the night running scene preset might also
                                                                         be useful while in a harbor. You may find it beneficial to experiment
3. Select the CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, or COLOR softkey, as                 with the different scene presets to discover the best preset to use
   appropriate.                                                          for different conditions.
4. Using the trackpad, adjust the level as required.
                                                                         Changing the thermal camera scene preset
                                                                         In the thermal camera application:
Thermal camera scene presets
                                                                         1. Use the SCENE softkey to switch between the available scene
Scene presets enable you to quickly select the best image setting            modes.
for the current environmental conditions.                                    The "scene" icon changes to reflect the current scene mode.
During normal operation the thermal camera automatically adjusts
itself to provide a high-contrast image optimized for most conditions.   Thermal camera color modes
The Scene presets provide 4 additional settings that may provide
better imagery in certain conditions. The 4 modes are:                   A range of color modes is available to help you distinguish objects
                                                                         on-screen in different conditions.
                                                                         The COLOR softkey switches the thermal camera image between
                                                                         a greyscale mode and 1 or more color modes. There are 5 color
                                                                         modes available.

244                                                                                                                            G-Series User reference
The factory default color mode is red, which may improve your night                                           White-hot thermal image.
vision. This default mode can be changed if required using the
camera's Video Setup menu.

 Note: If you have the Disable Color Thermal Video option
 selected in the camera's Video Setup menu, only 2 color modes
 are available -- greyscale and red.

Changing the thermal camera color mode
In the thermal camera application:
1. Use the COLOR softkey to switch between the available color
    modes.                                                                                                    Black-hot thermal image.

Thermal camera reverse video
You can reverse the polarity of the video image to change the
appearance of objects on-screen.
The reverse video option (video polarity) switches the thermal
image from white-hot (or red-hot if the color mode setting is active)
to black-hot. The difference between white-hot and black-hot is
shown below:

                                                                        You may find it useful to experiment with this option to find the best
                                                                        setting to suit your needs.

                                                                        Enabling thermal camera reverse video
                                                                        In the thermal camera application:
                                                                        1. Select the OPTIONS softkey.
                                                                        2. Use the REVERSE VIDEO softkey to switch the video polarity.




Using the thermal camera application                                                                                                       245
Thermal camera rear view mode                                        19.4 Camera setup
The rear view mode flips the video image horizontally, providing a
"mirror image".                                                      Accessing the thermal camera setup menu
This is useful for example in instances where the camera is          The thermal camera menu provides access to the camera's
rear-facing and you are viewing the image on a forward-facing        configuration options.
monitor.
                                                                     In the thermal camera application:
Enabling and disabling thermal camera rear view mode                 1. Select the OPTIONS softkey.
In   the thermal camera application:                                 2. Select the CAMERA MENU softkey.
1.    Select the OPTIONS softkey.                                     Note: For instructions on using the thermal camera's setup menu
2.    Select the CAMERA MODES softkey.                                refer to the documentation that accompanies the camera.
3.    Use the REAR VIEW softkey to select the ON or OFF option,
      as appropriate.




246                                                                                                                G-Series User reference
Chapter 20: DSC VHF radio integration

Chapter contents
·    20.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your display on page 248
·    20.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration on page 249




DSC VHF radio integration                                       247
20.1 Using a DSC VHF radio with your
display
You can connect your DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display
and show distress message information and GPS position data for
other vessels.
Connecting a DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display provides
the following additional functionality:
· Distress Messages -- when your DSC VHF radio receives a
  DSC message or alarm from another DSC VHF radio-equipped
  vessel, the vessel identification (MMSI), GPS position, and time
  of distress message is displayed on your multifunction display.
  You can use the softkeys on your multifunction display to clear the
  message, place a waypoint on the chart at the GPS position of
  the distressed vessel, or immediately start navigating (GOTO) to
  the GPS position.
· Position Data -- the "Position Request" button on your DSC VHF
  radio enables you to send and receive GPS position data to and
  from other vessels equipped with a DSC VHF radio.
For information on installing and operating your DSC VHF radio,
refer to the handbook that accompanies the radio.
The following image shows an example of a distress message
displayed on a multifunction display:




248                                                                     G-Series User reference
20.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration
To configure your multifunction display to show messages from your
DSC VHF radio:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the System Setup menu item.
3. Select the System Integration menu item.
4. Select the ON option for the DSC Message menu item.
5. Press the OK button.




DSC VHF radio integration                                            249
250   G-Series User reference
Chapter 21: Customizing your system

Chapter contents
·    21.1 Customizing the vessel icon on page 252
·    21.2 Customizing the databar on page 252
·    21.3 Compass setup on page 254
·    21.4 GPS setup on page 254
·    21.5 System setup menu on page 256




Customizing your system                             251
21.1 Customizing the vessel icon                             21.2 Customizing the databar
In   the chart application:
                                                             Moving the databar
1.    Press the MENU button.
                                                             1. Press the DATA button.
2.    Select Chart Setup.
                                                             2. Press and hold the DATABAR softkey until the Database Setup
3.    Select Vessel Icon Type
                                                                Menu dialog is displayed.
4.    Select the Sail or Power option, as appropriate.
                                                             3. Using the trackpad, select the Position menu item.
5.    Select Vessel Icon Size.
                                                             4. Using the trackpad, select the Top or Side option, as appropriate.
6.    Select Small Static or Large Static, as appropriate.
                                                             5. Press the OK button.
 Vessel icon       Vessel type                Chart view
                   Power / Sail -- small      2D / 3D        Changing the data displayed in the databar
                                                             1. Select the Databar Setup Menu:
                                                                i. Press the MENU button.
                   Power -- large             2D                ii. Select Databar Setup.
                                                                     The Databar Setup Menu is displayed.
                                                             2. To add data to the databar:
                                                                i. With the Databar Setup Menu displayed, select the
                   Power -- large             3D                     Configure menu item.
                                                                     A red border will appear in the databar, identifying the
                                                                     currently selected item.
                                                                ii. Using the trackpad, select the desired position in the databar
                   Sail -- large              2D                     for the new data.
                                                                iii. Select the ADD DATA softkey.
                                                                iv. Select the data group that contains the type of data you want
                                                                     to add.
                                                                v. Select a data element from the data group.
                   Sail -- large              3D
                                                                vi. Select an appropriate data type for the data.
                                                                vii. Press the OK button.
                                                             3. To move data in the databar:



252                                                                                                           G-Series User reference
   i. With the Databar Setup Menu displayed, select the               3. Bearing marker.
        Configure menu item.
                                                                      The compass bar is displayed using the DATA button.
        A red border will appear in the databar, identifying the
        currently selected item.                                      When displayed, the compass bar replaces the databar and is
   ii. Select the MOVE DATA softkey.                                  always positioned at the top of the screen.
   iii. Using the trackpad, move the item of data to the desired      The compass bar has 2 modes -- heading and COG:
        position in the databar.
                                                                      · In heading mode, the bearing marker is RED.
   iv. Press the OK button.
4. To remove a data item from the databar:                            · In COG mode, the bearing marker is GREEN.
   i. With the Databar Setup Menu displayed, select the               · When you use the compass bar with an active waypoint, the
        Configure menu item.                                            bearing marker is BLUE and the active waypoint symbol indicates
        A red border will appear in the databar, identifying the        the bearing to your waypoint.
        currently selected item.
                                                                      The default compass bar mode is heading. This mode can be
   ii. Using the trackpad, highlight the data item that you want to
                                                                      changed at any time using the Databar Setup menu.
        remove.
   iii. Select the REMOVE DATA softkey.                                Note: If a man overboard (MOB) alarm is activated while the
                                                                       compass bar is displayed, the compass is replaced with the MOB
Compass bar                                                            toolbar. The compass bar returns when you cancel the active
                                                                       MOB alarm.
The compass bar provides a continuous display of your current
heading or course over ground (COG).
                                                                      Displaying the compass bar
Arrows at either end of the bar indicate current steer direction.
                                                                      1. Press the DATA button.
  1                              2                                    2. Use the Databar softkey to select the COMP option.

                                                                      Configuring the compass bar
                                                                      1. Press the MENU button.
                                                                      2. Highlight theDatabar Setup.
                                                                      3. Select Heading or COG, as appropriate.
                                  3


1. Steer direction.
2. Active waypoint.
Customizing your system                                                                                                             253
21.3 Compass setup                                                   21.4 GPS setup
You may need to linearize or "swing" a connected compass to          The GPS setup options enable you to configure a connected GPS
achieve optimal accuracy.                                            receiver.
Linearizing or "swinging" your compass involves a calibration        The Global Positioning System (GPS) is used to position your
procedure to fine-tune the heading alignment.                        vessel on the chart. You can set up your GPS receiver and check
                                                                     its status from the GPS Status option in the Setup Menu. For each
 Note: This procedure is not suitable for calibrating an autopilot   tracked satellite, this screen provides the following information:
 compass. You calibrate an autopilot compass using the autopilot
 control head.                                                       · Satellite number.
                                                                     · Signal strength bar.
Linearizing the compass                                              · Status.
1.    Press the MENU button.                                         · Azimuth angle.
2.    Select Compass Setup.                                          · elevation angle.
3.    Select the Linearize Compass softkey.
                                                                     · A sky-view to show the position of tracked satellites.
4.    Follow the on-screen instructions.
5.    Use the rotary control to fine-tune the heading alignment.

                                                                        1                                                             6




                                                                        2



                                                                                                                                      5




                                                                                              3          4




254                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
 Item           Description
 1              Sky view -- a visual representation of the position of tracked
                satellites.
 2              Horizontal Dilution of Position (HDOP) -- a measure of
                GPS accuracy, calculated from a number of factors including
                satellite geometry, system errors in the data transmission and
                system errors in the GPS receiver. A higher figure signifies a
                greater positional error. A typical GPS receiver has an accuracy
                of between 5 and 15 m. As an example, assuming a GPS
                receiver error of 5 m, an HDOP of 2 would represent an error
                of approximately 15 m. Please remember that even a very
                low HDOP figure is NO guarantee that your GPS receiver is
                providing an accurate position. If in doubt, check the displayed
                vessel position in the chart application against your actual
                proximity to a known charted object.
 3              Fix status -- indicates the actual mode the GPS receiver is
                reporting (No Fix, Fix, D Fix or SD Fix).
 4              Datum -- The GPS receiver's datum setting affects the
                accuracy of the vessel position information displayed in the chart
                application. In order for your GPS receiver and multifunction
                display to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must
                be using the same datum. Refer to the Using the Chart chapter
                for more information.
 5              Mode -- the mode currently selected by the GPS receiver.
 6              Satellite status -- displays the signal strength and status of
                each satellite identified in the Sky view diagram on the left of
                the screen.

The accuracy of the GPS receiver depends on the parameters
detailed above, especially the azimuth and elevation angles which
are used in triangulation to calculate your position.



Customizing your system                                                              255
21.5 System setup menu
The following table describes the various options in the System Setup menu for your multifunction display.
 Menu item                            Description                                                        Options
 Boat Details                         The accurate operation of the collision alarm is dependent on      · Minimum Safe Depth
                                      you supplying suitable values for the Boat Details setting. You
                                      should specify the minimum safe depth, beam, and height for        · Minimum Safe Beam
                                      your vessel. The values you specify MUST be appropriate for        · Minimum Safe Height
                                      safe navigation, and must also take into account the position of
                                      the GPS antenna on your vessel, as the collision alarm uses
                                      data from the GPS antenna.
 Position Mode                        Determines how positioning data is displayed -- as Latitude /      · Lat / Long (default)
                                      Longitude coordinates, or Loran TDs.
                                                                                                         · TDs
 TD Setup                             When the Position Mode (see above) is set to TDs, you can          Chain
                                      specify the chain identifier, slave, and ASF values.
                                                                                                         · Various options, depending on cartography.
                                                                                                         Slave 1/2
                                                                                                         · Various options, depending on cartography.
                                                                                                         ASF 1/2
                                                                                                         · ­09.9 to +09.9
 Simulator                            Enables or disables simulator mode, which allows you to practice   · OFF (default)
                                      operating your multifunction display without data from a GPS
                                      antenna, fishfinder (DSM sonar), or any other external unit.       · ON
                                                                                                         · DEMO
 Simulator Speed                      Enables you to specify the speed at which the vessel icon will     · 1x
                                      move when the Simulator mode is enabled (see above).
                                                                                                         · 2x
                                                                                                         · 3x



256                                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
 Menu item                Description                                                         Options
 Bearing Mode             Determines how all bearing and heading data is displayed in.        · True (default)
                          This does not affect how the chart or radar displays are drawn.
                                                                                              · Magnetic
 MOB Data Type            Determines whether positional data or dead reckoning is             · Dead Reckoning
                          displayed. Assuming that your vessel and the Man Overboard
                          (MOB) are subject to the same tide and wind effects, the dead       · Position (default)
                          reckoning setting normally gives a more accurate course.
 Variation Source         This setting compensates for the naturally occuring offset          · Auto (compensation value displayed in
                          of the earth's magnetic field. When set to Auto, the system           brackets) (default)
                          automatically compensates, and displays the compensation
                          value in brackets. To enter your own compensation value, use        · Manual
                          the Manual option, then specify the value using the Manual
                          Variation setting (see below).
 Manual Variation         When the Variation Source menu item is set to Manual (see           · 0 degrees East (default)
                          above), you use the Manual Variation setting to specify the
                          compensation value that you want to use. This value is also         · Range: 0 to 30 degrees East or West
                          transmitted to any other connected Raymarine instruments.           ·
 Language                 Determines the language that will be used for all on-screen text,
                          labels, menus and options.
 Ground Trip Reset        Resets the chosen ground trip distance counter to zero.             · Ground Trip 1 Reset
                                                                                              · Ground Trip 2 Reset
                                                                                              · Ground Trip 3 Reset
                                                                                              · Ground Trip 4 Reset
 Settings Reset           Resets all system setup menus, including page sets and the          Reset Defaults confirmation
                          databar, to the factory default settings. Waypoints, routes and
                          tracks are NOT deleted.                                             · YES
                                                                                              · NO




Customizing your system                                                                                                                 257
 Menu item                 Description                                                       Options
 Settings and Data Reset   Resets all system setup menus, including page sets and the        Factory Reset confirmation
                           databar, to the factory default settings. Waypoints, routes and
                           tracks ARE deleted.                                               · YES
                                                                                             · NO
                            Note: For systems using multiple multifunction displays
                            (networked displays), the complete system database is
                            deleted on the data master (primary display). Only the
                            waypoints, routes and tracks will be deleted from any
                            additional multifunction displays.

                            Note: If this reset function is performed on a G-Series
                            system it will also delete your Nav Station settings.

 Time / Date Setup         These options enable you to customize the time and date format    Date Format
                           to your requirements. You can also specify a local time offset
                           from Universal Time Constant (UTC), to compensate for any         · mm/dd/yy
                           time zone difference.                                             · dd/mm/yy
                                                                                             Time Format
                                                                                             · 12 hr
                                                                                             · 24 hr
                                                                                             Local Time Offset
                                                                                             · ­013.0 to +013.0




258                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
 Menu item                Description                                                       Options
 Units Setup              Enables you to specify the units used for the following key       Distance Units
                          measurements:
                                                                                            · Nautical Miles (default)
                          · Distance
                                                                                            · Statute Miles
                          · Speed
                                                                                            · Kilometers
                          · Depth
                                                                                            Speed Units
                          · Temperature
                                                                                            · Knots (default)
                          · Pressure
                                                                                            · mph (miles per hour)
                          · Volume
                                                                                            · kph (kilometers per hour)
                           Note: If the Distance unit is set to Nautical Miles or Statute   Depth Units
                           Miles, and the data displayed is less than 1 unit, the system
                           displays the units in Feet. If the Distance unit is set to       · Meters
                           Kilometers, the system displays the units in Meters.
                                                                                            · Feet (default)
                                                                                            · Fathoms
                                                                                            Temperature Units
                                                                                            · Fahrenheit (default)
                                                                                            · Celsius
                                                                                            Pressure Units
                                                                                            · Bar
                                                                                            · PSI (default)
                                                                                            · Kilopascals
                                                                                            Volume Units
                                                                                            · US Gallons
                                                                                            · Imp (Imperial) Gallons (default)

Customizing your system                                                                                                          259
 Menu item            Description                                                          Options

                                                                                           · Liters
 System Integration   Determines the connection settings for external equipment. The       Autopilot Control
                      following items are available in the sub-menu:
                                                                                           · Disabled (default)
                      · Autopilot Control -- If set to Enabled, this option allows you
                        to control certain aspects of a connected pilot control head,      · Enabled
                        such as sending commands to engage and disengage the               DSC Message
                        autopilot. If set to Disabled, you will not be able to control
                        the autopilot from your multifunction display, and all functions   · OFF
                        must be controlled from the pilot control head itself.
                                                                                           · ON (default)
                      · DSC Message -- If set to ON, details of distress DSC
                                                                                           SeaTalk Alarms
                        messages from a connected DSC VHF radio will be displayed
                        on your multifunction display. If set to OFF, the messages will    · ON (default)
                        NOT be displayed on your multifunction display.
                                                                                           · OFF
                      · SeaTalk Alarms -- If set to ON, all system alarms generated
                        by any connected SeaTalk units will be displayed on your           Preferred GPS Source
                        multifunction display. If set to OFF, the alarms will NOT be
                        displayed on your multifunction display.                           · SeaTalkng / NMEA2000 (default)

                      · Preferred GPS Source -- Your multifunction display                 · SeaTalk1
                        supports GPS receivers connected by SeaTalk1, SeaTalkng,           · NMEA0183
                        or NMEA2000. Select the preferred source.
                                                                                           Data Master
                      · Data Master -- If you have more than one multifunction
                        display on the same network, one of them must be set as the        · ON (default)
                        data master. When this option is set to ON, the multifunction
                                                                                           · OFF
                        display you are currently using will be set as the data master.
                                                                                           Bridge NMEA Heading
                      · Bridge NMEA Heading -- If set to ON, NMEA heading data
                        will be bridged onto the SeaTalk data bus, and will be sent to     · OFF (default)
                        all NMEA-connected devices. If set to OFF, NMEA heading
                        data will NOT be bridged onto the SeaTalk bus. An example          · ON
                        of a use for this setting is when using MARPA with an external     Keyboard
                        fast heading sensor, in which case you should set this option


260                                                                                                                    G-Series User reference
 Menu item                Description                                                     Options
                            to OFF to ensure that all NMEA-connected units receive
                            heading data from the external heading sensor.                · OFF

                          · Keyboard -- Set to ONE or ALL if you have an external         · ALL (default)
                            keyboard connected. Otherwise, set to OFF.                    · ONE
                          · NMEA Output Setup -- allows you to enable or disable the      NMEA Output Setup
                            individual NMEA output "sentences" for each NMEA port.
                                                                                          · APB
                          · NMEA Port Setting -- Allows you to specify the appropriate
                            port speed for the equipment connected to each NMEA port.     · BWC
                            When the Navtex 4800 or Navtex 9600 option is selected, you
                            will be able to view the Navtex message list. Use the AIS     · BWR
                            38400 option for AIS receivers.                               · DBT
                                                                                          · DPT
                                                                                          · GGA
                                                                                          · GLL
                                                                                          · GSA
                                                                                          · MTW
                                                                                          · MWV
                                                                                          · RMA
                                                                                          · RMB
                                                                                          · RMC
                                                                                          · RSD
                                                                                          · RTE
                                                                                          · TTM
                                                                                          · VHW
                                                                                          · VLW

Customizing your system                                                                                       261
 Menu item                 Description                                              Options

                                                                                    · WPL
                                                                                    · VTG
                                                                                    · ZDA
                                                                                    NMEA Port Setting
                                                                                    · NMEA 4800 (default)
                                                                                    · Navtex 4800
                                                                                    · Navtex 9600
                                                                                    · AIS 38400
 Waypoint Password Setup   This menu allows you to enable password protection for   Enable Password
                           waypoints, and to change the password.
                                                                                    · OFF (default)
                                                                                    · ON
                                                                                    Change Password
                                                                                    · Displays Edit Waypoint Password dialog.




262                                                                                                              G-Series User reference
Chapter 22: Maintaining your display

Chapter contents
·    22.1 Service and maintenance on page 264
·    22.2 Routine equipment checks on page 264
·    22.3 Cleaning on page 265
·    22.4 Cleaning the display screen on page 265




Maintaining your display                            263
22.1 Service and maintenance                                        22.2 Routine equipment checks
This product contains no user serviceable components. Please        Raymarine strongly recommends that you complete a number of
refer all maintenance and repair to authorized Raymarine dealers.   routine checks to ensure the correct and reliable operation of your
Unauthorized repair may affect your warranty.                       equipment.
                                                                    Complete the following checks on a regular basis:
                                                                    · Examine all cables for signs of damage or wear and tear.
                                                                    · Check that all cables are securely connected.




264                                                                                                                   G-Series User reference
22.3 Cleaning                                                      22.4 Cleaning the display screen
Best cleaning practices.                                           A coating is applied to the display screen. This makes it water
                                                                   repellent, and prevents glare. To avoid damaging this coating, follow
When cleaning this product:                                        this procedure:
· Do NOT wipe the display screen with a dry cloth, as this could   1. Switch off the power to the display.
  scratch the screen coating.                                      2. Rinse the screen with fresh water to remove all dirt particles
· Do NOT use abrasive, or acid or ammonia based products.              and salt deposits.
                                                                   3. Allow the screen to dry naturally.
· Do NOT use a jet wash.
                                                                   4. If any smears remain, very gently wipe the screen with a clean
                                                                       microfibre cleaning cloth (available from an opticians).




Maintaining your display                                                                                                             265
266   G-Series User reference
Chapter 23: Technical support

Chapter contents
·    23.1 Raymarine customer support on page 268
·    23.2 3rd party support on page 269




Technical support                                  267
23.1 Raymarine customer support                                         Viewing multifunction display software
                                                                        information
Raymarine provides a comprehensive customer support service.
You can contact customer support through the Raymarine website,         1.   Press the MENU button.
telephone and email. If you are unable to resolve a problem, please     2.   Select System Diagnostics.
use any of these facilities to obtain additional help.
                                                                        3.   Select Software Services.
Web support                                                             4.   Select Unit Info.
Please visit the customer support area of our website at:                    A range of information is displayed, including the App Version
www.raymarine.com                                                            (software version).
This contains Frequently Asked Questions, servicing information,
e-mail access to the Raymarine Technical Support Department and
details of worldwide Raymarine agents.

Telephone and email support
In the USA:
· Tel: +1 603 881 5200 extension 2444
· Email: Raymarine@custhelp.com
In the UK, Europe, the Middle East, or Far East:
· Tel: +44 (0)23 9271 4713
· Email: ukproduct.support@raymarine.com

Product information
If you need to request service, please have the following information
to hand:
· Product name.
· Product identity.
· Serial number.
· Software application version.
You can obtain this product information using the menus within your
product.

268                                                                                                                       G-Series User reference
23.2 3rd party support
Contact and support details for 3rd party suppliers can be found on
the appropriate websites.

Navionics
www.navionics.com

Sirius marine weather
www.sirius.com/marineweather

Sirius audio
www.sirius.com




Technical support                                                     269
www.ra ym a rin e .c o m


Ad by Google

Disclaimer:
The information on this web site has not been checked for accuracy. It is for entertainment purposes only and should be independently verified before using for any other reason. There are five sources. 1) Documents and manuals from a variety of sources. These have not been checked for accuracy and in many cases have not even been read by anyone associated with L-36.com. I have no idea of they are useful or accurate, I leave that to the reader. 2) Articles others have written and submitted. If you have questions on these, please contact the author. 3) Articles that represent my personal opinions. These are intended to promote thought and for entertainment. These are not intended to be fact, they are my opinions. 4) Small programs that generate result presented on a web page. Like any computer program, these may and in some cases do have errors. Almost all of these also make simplifying assumptions so they are not totally accurate even if there are no errors. Please verify all results. 5) Weather information is from numerious of sources and is presented automatically. It is not checked for accuracy either by anyone at L-36.com or by the source which is typically the US Government. See the NOAA web site for their disclaimer. Finally, tide and current data on this site is from 2007 and 2008 data bases, which may contain even older data. Changes in harbors due to building or dredging change tides and currents and for that reason many of the locations presented are no longer supported by newer data bases. For example, there is very little tidal current data in newer data bases so current data is likely wrong to some extent. This data is NOT FOR NAVIGATION. See the XTide disclaimer for details. In addition, tide and current are influenced by storms, river flow, and other factors beyond the ability of any predictive program.